Skip to main content

Full text of "Line & form"

See other formats


i  LIKE -7VND- FORM 

1  BY-WALTER.- CRTf 


LONDOH: 


LINE  AND  FORM 


•BY-WALTER- CR7WE- 


LONDON:  G.  BELL  &  SONS,  LTD 
1914 


N-C 


medium  8w,  1900. 

7  Sv0t  1902,  1904,  1908, 


CHISWICK    PRESS:    CHARLES    WHITTINGHAM   AND   CO. 
TOOKS  COURT,   CHANCERY   LANE,    LONDON 


PREFACE 

AS  in  the  case  of  "  The  Bases  of  Design," 
to  which  this  is  intended  to  form  a  com- 
panion volume,  the  substance  of  the  following 
chapters  on  Line  and  Form  originally  formed 
a  series  of  lectures  delivered  to  the  students  of 
the  Manchester  Municipal  School  of  Art. 

There  is  no  pretension  to  an  exhaustive 
treatment  of  a  subject  it  would  be  difficult  enough 
to  exhaust,  and  it  is  dealt  with  in  a  way  intended 
to  bear  rather  upon  the  practical  work  of  an  art 
school,  and  to  be  suggestive  and  helpful  to  those 
face  to  face  with  the  current  problems  of  drawing 
and  design. 

These  have  been  approached  from  a  personal 
point  of  view,  as  the  results  of  conclusions  arrived 
at  in  the  course  of  a  busy  working  life  which 
has  left  but  few  intervals  for  the  elaboration  of 
theories  apart  from  practice,  and  such  as  they 
are,  these  papers  are  now  offered  to  the  wider 
circle  of  students  and  workers  in  the  arts  of 
design  as  from  one  of  themselves. 

They  were  illustrated  largely  by  means  of  rough 
sketching  in  line  before  my  student  audience,  as 
well  as  by  photographs  and  drawings.  The  rough 
diagrams  have  been  re-drawn,  and  the  other 
illustrations  reproduced,  so  that  both  line  and  tone 
blocks  are  used,  uniformity  being  sacrificed  to 
fidelity. 

WALTER  CRANE. 

Kensington,  Ju/y,  1900. 


CONTENTS 

CHAPTER   I 

Origin  and  Function  of  Outline — Silhouette — Defini- 
tion of  Boundaries  by — Power  of  Characterization  by — 
Formation  of  Letters — Methods  of  Drawing  in  Line— 
The  Progressive  Method — The  Calligraphic  Method — 
The  Tentative  Method — The  Japanese  Direct  Brush 
Method— The  Oval  Method— The  Rectangular  Method 
— Quality  of  Line — Linear  Expression  of  Movement — 
Textures — Emotion — Scale  of  Linear  Expression  ...  i 

^CHAPTER   II 

The  Language  of  Line — Dialects — Comparison  of  the 
Style  of  Various  Artists  in  Line — Scale  of  Degrees  in 
Line — Picture  Writing — Relation  of  Line  to  Form — Two 
Paths — The  Graphic  Purpose — Aspect — The  Ornamental 
Purpose — Typical  Treatment  or  Convention — Rhythm — 
Linear  Plans  in  Pattern  Designing — Wall-paper  Design — 
Controlling  Forms — Memory — Evolution  in  Design — 
Variety  in  Unity — Counterbalance — Linear  Logic — Re- 
curring Line  and  Form — Principle  of  Radiation — Range 
and  Use  of  Line 23 

CHAPTER   III 

Of  the  Choice  and  Use  of  Line — Degree  and  Emphasis 
—  Influence  of  the  Photograph — The  Value  of  Emphasis 
-The  Technical  Influence— The  Artistic  Purpose— In- 
fluence of  Material  and  Tools — Brushwork — Charcoal- 
Pencil— Pen  51 

CHAPTER   IV 

Of  the  Choice  of  Form — Elementary  Forms — Space- 
filling— Grouping — Analogies  of  Form — Typical  Forms 

vii 


CONTENTS                                                                    /PAGE 
of  Ornament — Ornamental  Units — Equivalents  in  Form 
— Quantities  in  Design — Contrast — Value  of  Variations 
of  Similar  or  Allied  Forms — Use  of  the  Human  Figure 
and  Animal  Forms  in  Ornamental  Design 73 

CHAPTER  V 

Of  the  Influence  of  Controlling  Lines,  Boundaries 
Spaces,  and  Plans  in  Designing — Origin  of  Geometric 
Decorative  Spaces  and  Panels  in  Architecture — Value  of 
Recurring  Line — Tradition — Extension — Adaptability — 
Geometric  Structural  Plans — Frieze  and  Field —Ceiling 
Decoration— Co-operative  Relation  . 108 


CHAPTER   VI 

~j 

Of  the  Fundamental  Essentials  of  Design  :  Line,  Form, 
Space — Principles  of  Structural  and  Ornamental  Line  in 
Organic  Forms — Form  and  Mass  in  Foliage — Roofs — 
The  Mediaeval  City — Organic  and  Accidental  Beauty- 
Composition  :  Formal  and  Informal— Power  of  Linear 
Expression — Relation  of  Masses  and  Lines — Principles 
of  Harmonious  Composition 138 


CHAPTER  VII 

Of  the  Relief  of  Form— Three  Methods— Contrast- 
Light  and  Shade,  and  Modelling — The  Use  of  Contrast 
and  Planes  in  Pattern  Designing — Decorative  Relief- 
Simple  Linear  Contrast — Relief  by  Linear  Shading — 
Different  Emphasis  in  relieving  Form  by  Shading  Lines 
— Relief  by  means  of  Light  and  Shade  alone  without 
Outline— Photographic  Projection — Relief  by  different 
Planes  and  Contrasts  of  Concave  and  Convex  Surfaces  in 
Architectural  Mouldings — Modelled  Relief—  Decorative 
Use  of  Light  and  Shade,  and  different  Planes  in  Modelling 
and  Carving— Egyptian  System  of  Relief  Sculpture- 
Greek  and  Gothic  Architectural  Sculpture,  influenced  by 
Structural  and  Ornamental  Feeling — Sculptural  Tombs, 
Medals,  Coins,  Gems — Florentine  Fifteenth-century  Re- 
liefs— Desiderio  di  Settignano 165 

viii 


CONTENTS 
CHAPTER   VIII  PAGE 

Of  the  Expression  of  Relief  in  Line-drawing — Graphic 
Aim  and  Ornamental  Aim — Superficial  Appearance  and 
Constructive  Reality — Accidents  and  Essentials — Repre- 
sentation and  Suggestion  of  Natural  Form  in  Design — 
The  Outward  Vision  and  the  Inner  Vision 204 

CHAPTER   IX 

Of  the  Adaptation  of  Line  and  Form  in  Design,  in 

various   materials   and    methods — Mural    Decoration — 

Fresco-work  of  the  Italian  Painters — Modern  Mural  Work 

— Mural  Spacing  and  Pattern  Plans — Scale — The  Skirting 

-The  Dado  — Field  of  the  Wall— The  Frieze— Panelling 

—Tapestry — Textile  Design — Persian  Carpets — Effect  of 

Texture  on  Colour — Prints— Wall-paper — Stained  Glass     224 

CHAPTER   X 

Of  the  Expression  and  Relief  of  Line  and  Form  by 
Colour— Effect  of  same  Colour  upon  different  Grounds 
— Radiation  of  Colour — White  Outline  to  clear  Colours 
— Quality  of  Tints  relieved  upon  other  Tints — Comple- 
mentaries — Harmony — The  Colour  Sense — Colour  Pro- 
portions— Importance  of  Pure  Tints — Tones  and  Planes 
— The  Tone  of  Time— Pattern  and  Picture— A  Pattern 
not  necessarily  a  Picture,  but  a  Picture  in  principle  a 
Pattern — Chiaroscuro — Examples  of  Pattern-work  and 
Picture-work — Picture- patterns  and  Pattern-pictures  .  .  256 

INDEX 283 


IX 


LIST  OF   ILLUSTRATIONS 


PAGE 

The  Origin*  of  Outline xvi 

Silhouettes 2 

Coast  and  Mountain  Lines — Gulf  of  Nauplia 3 

Proportions  of  Roman  Capital  Letters  and  of  lower-case 

German  text.     From  Diirer's  "  Geometrica  "...  5 

The  Progressive  Method  of  Drawing  in  Line 7 

The  Calligraphic  Method 8 

The  Tentative  Method 9 

The  Oval  and  Rectangular  Methods 1 1 

Lines  of  Characterization  in  the  Form  and  Feature  of 

Flowers  :  Lily  and  Poppy 13 

Silhouette  of  Beech  Leaves  and  Line  Rendering  of  the 

same „  ' .     .     .  14 

Lines  of  Movement 15 

Effect  of  Wind  upon  Trees 16 

Line  Arrangement  in  ribbed  Sea-sand 17 

Lines  of  different  Textures,  Structures,  and  Services     .     .  19 
Lines  of  Exaltation  and  Rejoicing  in  Unison.     The  Morn- 
ing Stars,  after  William  Blake 20 

Lines  of  Grief  and  Dejection :   Designs  from  Flaxman's 

Homer 21 

Landscape 22 

Scale  of  various  Degrees  of  Linear  Weight  and  Emphasis .  2  5 

Curvilinear  Scale  of  Direction 26 

Rectangular  Scale  of  Direction 26 

Picture  Writing 28 

Olive  Branch,  from  Nature 30 

Olive  Branch,  simplified  in  Decorative  Treatment  .     .     .  32 

Study  of  Horned  Poppy 33 

Adaptation  of  Horned  Poppy  in  Design :  Vertical  Panel 

for  Needlework 34 

Question  and  Answer  in  Line 35,  36 

x 


LIST   OF   ILLUSTRATIONS 

PAGE 

Diagram  showing  the  Use  of  a  Geometric  Basis  in  Design- 
ing a  Repeating  Pattern 37 

Use  of  Controlling  Boundaries  in  Designing  Sprays      .     .  39 

Method  of  Testing  a  Repeating  Pattern 41 

Sketch  to  show  how  a  Pattern  of  Diverse  Elements  may 
be  harmonized  by  Unity  of  Inclosing  and  Intermediary 

Lines 42 

The  Principle  of  Counterbalance  in  different  Systems  of 

Design 43 

Border  Units  and  Border  Motive 45 

Recurring  Line  and  Form  in  Border  Motives      ....  46 

Radiating  Principle  of  Line  in  Natural  Form 48 

Radiating  Lines  of  the  Pectoral  Muscles  and  Ribs  ...  49 

Vaulting  of  Chapter  House,  Westminster 50 

Lines  of  Characterization  of  Feathers  and  Shells      ...  5  2 

Pen  Drawing  of  Fruit 54 

Effect  of  different  Emphasis  in  Treatment  of  the  same 

Designs 57,  58 

Effect  of  different  Emphasis  in  the  Drawing  of  Landscape  59 
Example  of  Page  Treatment  to  show  Ornamental  Relation 

between  Text  and  Pictures 60 

Suggestion  for  a  Carpet  Pattern  and  Abstract  Treatment  of 

the  same  on  Point  Paper  as  detail  of  Brussels  Carpet  61 

Brush  Forms 66 

Direct  Brush  Expression  of  Animal  Form 67 

Japanese  Drawing  of  a  Bird.     From  "  The  Hundred  Birds 

ofBari" 69 

Elementary  Geometrical  Forms 74 

Use  of  the  same  Forms  in  Architecture 74 

Poppy-heads 75 

Apple  cut  to  show  Position  of  Seeds 77 

Cube  and  Sphere  in  Architectural  Ornament 78 

Filling  of  Square  Space 80 

Filling  of  Circular  Space 81 

Inlay  Design  :  Pattern  Units  and  Motives 82 

Grouping  of  Allied  Forms  :  Composition  of  Curves      .     .  84 

Grouping  of  Allied  Forms  :  Composition  of  Angles      .     .  85 

Still-life  Group  illustrative  of  Wood-engraving      ....  86 

Japanese  Diagonal  Pattern 87 

Treatment   of   Fruit   and    Leaf   Forms :    Corresponding 

Curvature ...  88 

xi 


LIST   OF   ILLUSTRATIONS 

PAGE 

Correspondence  in  General  Contour  between  Leaf  and 

Tree 90 

Some  Analogies  in  Form 91 

Tree  of  Typical  Pattern  Forms,  Units  and  Systems    .     .       93 
Sketches  to  show  Use  of  Counterbalance,  Quantity,  and 

Equivalents  in  Designing 96 

Quantities  and  Counterchange  of  Border  and  Field  in 

Carpet  Motives 97 

Sketches  to  illustrate  Value  of  different  Quantities  in 

Persian  Rugs 98,-! oo 

Recurrence  and  Contrast  in  Border  Motives      .     .     .     .     102 
Use  of  inclosing  Boundaries  in  Designing  Animal  Forms 

in  Decorative  Pattern 104 

Deco  -ative  Spacing  of  Figures  within  Geometric  Bound- 
aries    105 

Simple  Linear  Motives  and  Pattern  Bases 109 

Use  of  Intervals  in  Repeating  the  same  Ornamental  Units     1 1 1 
Designs  of  Floral,  Human,  and  Animal  Forms,  governed 

by  Shape  of  inclosing  Boundary 112 

The  Parthenon  :  Sketch  to  show  Spaces  used  for  Decora- 
tive Sculpture  in  Greek  Architecture      114 

The  Tower  of  the  Winds,  Athens 115 

Sket  :h  of  part  of  the  Arch  of  Constantine  to  show  spaces 

for  Decorative  Sculpture  in  Roman  Architecture      .     117 
Byzantine  (Mosaic)  Treatment  of  Architectural  Structural 

Features  :  Apse,  S.  Vitale,  Ravenna 1 1 8 

Detail  of  Canopy  of  Tomb  of  Gervaise-Alard,  Winchelsea     1 20 

Walberswick  Church:  West  Door 120 

Miserere  in  St.  David's  Cathedral ...122 

R  cessed  Panel  from  the  Tomb  of  Bishop  John  Morgan, 

St.  David's  Cathedral 123 

Corbel  from  Bishop  Vaughan's  Chapel,  St.  David's  Ca- 
thedral      124 

Gothic  Tile  Pattern,  St.  David's  Cathedral 125 

Surface  Pattern  Motives  derived  from  Lines  of  Structure      128 
Repeating  Patterns  built  upon  Square  and  Circular  Bases     129 

Plan  of  a  Drop  Repeat 131 

Sketch  Designs  to  show  Relation  between  Frieze  and 

Field  in  Wall-paper 135 

Principles  of  Structural  and  Ornamental  Line  in  Natural 

Forms 140 

xii 


LIST   OF   ILLUSTRATIONS 

PAGE 

Radiating,  Recurring  and  Counterbalancing  Lines  in  the 

Structure  of  the  Skeleton  and  the  Muscles.     .     .     .  142 
General  Principles  of  Line  and  Form  in  the  Branching 

and  Foliage  Masses  of  Trees 143 

Principles  of  Structure  in  Foliage  Masses 145 

Albert  Diirer  :  Detail  from  "  The  Prodigal  Son  "    ...  146 

Albert  Diirer:  St.  Anthony 147 

Roof-lines :  Rothenburg 149 

St.  Margaret  Street,  Canterbury 153 

Figure  Designs  controlled  by  Geometric  Boundaries  .155,  156 

Expression  of  Storm  and  Calm  in  Landscape     ....  159 

Expression  of  Repose  and  Action 161 

Controlling  Lines  of  Movement :   Movement  in  a  Pro- 
cession      163 

Lines   left    by   a  Watercourse — Lines   governing   fallen 

Debris  from  a  Quarry 163 

Relief  of  Form,  (T)  by  Outline,  (2)  by  Contrast,  (3)  by 

Light  and  Shade 167 

Relief  of  Form  and  Line  in  Pattern  Design  by  means  of 

Contrast  and  the  Use  of  Planes 169 

Treatment  of  Mantling  (i4th-i6th  centuries)      .     .     .  172,  173 

Brass  of  Martin  de  Visch,  Bruges,  1452    .     .     .     .     .     .  175 

Relief  in  Pattern   Design  by  means  of  Simple  Linear 

Contrasts 177 

Relief  by  adding  Shading  Lines  to  Outline 178 

Relief  by  Diagonal  Shading 179 

Different  Method  and  different  Emphasis  in  Relieving 

Form  by  Shading  Lines 181 

Albert  Diirer's  Principle  in  the  Treatment  of  Drapery  : 

From   the  Woodcut  in  the   "  Life  of  the  Virgin " 

Series 183 

Albert  Diirer  :  Pen-drawing 1 84 

Filippino  Lippi :  Study  of  Drapery 185 

Raphael:  Studies  of  Drapery 186 

Relief  by  means  of  Light  and  Shade  alone,  in  Pen-drawing 

without  Outline 188 

Relief  by  means  of  White  Line  on  a  Dark  Ground  and 

vice  versa 189 

Relief  in  Architectural  Mouldings 191 

Roman  Treatment  of  Corinthian  Order,  Forum  of  Nerva, 

Rome 193 

xiii 


LIST   OF   ILLUSTRATIONS 

PAGE 

Egyptian  Relief  Sculpture  :  Thebes 195 

Greek  Relief:  Eleusis 196 

Egyptian  Relief:  Denderah 196 

Chartres  Cathedral :  Carving  on  West  Front      ....     199 
Chartres  Cathedral :  Tympanum  of  Central  Door  of  West 

Front 20 1 

Medals  of  the  Lords  of  Mantua,  Cesena,  and  Ferrara,  by 

Vittore  Pisano 203 

Treatment  of  Draped  Figure  in  Black  on  White  Ground 

and  vice  versa 206 

Treatment  of  the  same  Figure  in  Light  and  Shade      .     .     207 
The   Graphic   Principle  of  the  Expression  of  Form  by 

Light  and  Shade ;  with  and  without  Outline  .     .     .     209 
Linear  Expression  of  Features,  Feathers  and  Fur  :  Notes 

from  Nature 211 

Sketches  to  illustrate  the  Graphic  and  the  Decorative 

Treatment  of  Draped  Figures 213 

Decorative  Treatment  of  Birds 215 

Floral  Designs  upon  Typical  Inclosing  Shapes  of  Indian 

and  Persian  Ornament 217 

Dancing  Figure  with  the  Governing  Lines  of  the  Move- 
ment   218 

Lines  of  Floral  Growth  and  Structure  :  Lily  and  Rose    .     219 

Coast-lines,  Gulf  of  Nauplia 221 

Lines  of  Movement  in  Water,  Shallow  Stream  over  Sand     221 

Giotto:  Chastity  (Lower  Church,  Assisi) 225 

Pinturicchio  :  Mural  Painting  (Piccolomini  Chapel,  Siena)     227 
Diagram  showing  the  Principal  Fundamental  Plans  or 
Systems  of  Line  governing  Mural  Spacing  and  Dec- 
orative Distribution 231 

Diagram  to  show  how  the  apparent  Depth  of  a  Space  is 
increased  by  the   Use  of  Vertical  Lines,   and   its 
apparent  Width  by  the  Use  of  Horizontal  Lines .     .     233 
Decorative  Spacing  of  the  Wall :  Sketches  (to  half-inch 

scale)  to  show  different  Treatment  and  Proportions      235 
Figure  of  Laura,  from  the  Burgundian  Tapestries :  The 
Triumphs  of  Petrarch,  in  the  South  Kensington  Mu- 
seum            .     .     239 

Pinturicchio:  Fresco  in  the  Appartimenti  Borgia  .     .   -.     241 
Portion  of  Detail  of  the  Holy  Carpet  of  the  Mosque  of 

Ardebil :  Persian,  sixteenth  century 243 

xiv 


LIST   OF   ILLUSTRATIONS 

PAGE 

Sketch  to  illustrate  Treatment  of  Borders  in  a  Persian 

Rug 245 

Arras   Tapestry :    Diagrams   to   show   the   Principle   of 

Working  and  Surface  Effect 247 

Contrasting  Surfaces  in  Warp  and  Weft  in  Woven  Silk 

Hanging 249 

Indian  printed  Cotton  Cover :    South  Kensington  Mu- 
seum    251 

Stained  Glass  Treatment :  Inclosure  of  Form  and  Colour 

by  Lead  Lines 253 

Sketch  to  show  Effect  of  the  same  Colour  and  Form  upon 

different  Coloured  Grounds 257 

Principle  of  the  Effect  of  the  Blending  or  Blurring  of 

Colours  at  their  Edges 259 

Use  of  Black  and  White  Outline  to  clear  the  Edges  of 

Coloured  Forms  upon  different  Coloured  Grounds  .  259 

J.  Van  Eyck:  Portrait  of  J.  Arnolfini  and  his  WTife     .     .  268 

Ver  Meer  of  Delft :  Lady  at  a  Spinet 269 

Botticelli:  The  Nativity 273 

Holbein:  The  Ambassadors 275 

Botticelli:  Madonna  and  Child 276 

Crivelli :  The  Annunciation  . 277 

Perugino  :  The  Virgin  in  Adoration  with  St.  Michael  and 

St.  Raphael,  and  Tobias 278 

Titian:  Bacchus  and  Ariadne 279 

Madox  Brown  :  Christ  Washing  St.  Peter's  Feet    .     .     .  281 


XV 


THE   ORIGIN    OF   OUTLINE. 


OF   LINE  AND   FORM 

CHAPTER   I 

Origin  and  Function  of  Outline — Silhouette— Definition  of 
Boundaries  by — Power  of  Characterization  by — Formation  of 
Letters — Methods  of  Drawing  in  Line — The  Progressive 
Method— The  Calligraphic  Method — The  Tentative  Method 
—The  Japanese  Direct  Brush  Method — The  Oval  Method — 
The  Rectangular  Method — Quality  of  Line — Linear  Expression 
of  Movement — Textures — Emotion — Scale  of  Linear  Expres- 
sion. 

OUTLINE,  one  might  say,  is  the  Alpha  and 
Omega  of  Art.  It  is  the  earliest  mode  of 
expression  among  primitive  peoples,  as  it  is  with 
the  individual  child,  and  it  has  been  cultivated  for 
its  power  of  characterization  and  expression,  and  as 
an  ultimate  test  of  draughtsmanship,  by  the  most 
accomplished  artists  of  all  time. 

The  old  fanciful  story  of  its  origin  in  the  work 
of  a  lover  who  traced  in  charcoal  the  boundary  of 
the  shadow  of  the  head  of  his  sweetheart  as  cast 
upon  the  wall  by  the  sun, and  thus  obtained  the  first 
profile  portrait,  is  probably  more  true  in  substance 
than  in  fact,  but  it  certainly  illustrates  Disfunction 
of  outline  as  the  definition  of  the  boundaries  of 
form. 


SILHOUETTE 

As  children  we  probably  perceive  forms  in  nature 

defined  as  flat  shapes  of 
colour  relieved  upon  other 
colours,  or  flat  fields  of 
ight  on  dark,  as  a  white 
horse  is  defined  upon  the 
green  grass  of  a  field,  or  a 
black  figure  upon  a  back- 
ground of  snow. 

To  define  the  bound- 
aries of  such  forms  be- 
comes the  main  object  in 
early  attempts  at  artistic 
expression.  The  atten- 
tion is  caught  by  the 
edges — the  shape  of  the 


silhouette    which    remains   the   paramount  means 
of  distinction  of  form  when  details  and  secondary 


DEFINITION  OF  BOUNDARIES 
characteristics  are  lost  ;  as  the  outlines  of  moun- 
tains remain,  or  are  even  more  clearly  seen,  when 
distance  subdues  the  details  of  their  structure, 
and  evening  mists  throw  them  into  flat  planes 
one  behind  the  other,  and  leave  nothing  but  the 
delicate  lines  of  their  edges  to  tell  their  char- 
acter. We  feel  the  beauty  and  simplicity  of  such 
effects  in  nature.  We  feel  that  the  mind,  through 
the  eye  resting  upon  these  quiet  planes  and  deli- 


OCWST  &  MOUNTAIN  LINES 

cutr  or  NAUPUI>V 


cate  lines,  receives  a  sense  of  repose  and  poetic  sug- 
gestion which  is  lost  in  the  bright  noontide,  with 
all  its  wealth  of  glittering  detail,  sharp  cut  in  light 
and  shade.  There  is  no  doubt  that  this  typical 
power  of  outline  and  the  value  of  simplicity  of  mass 
were  perceived  by  the  ancients,  notably  the  Ancient 
Egyptians  and  the  Greeks,  who  both,  in  their  own 
ways,  in  their  art  show  a  wonderful  power  of  char- 
acterization by  means  of  line  and  mass,  and  a  deli- 
cate sense  of  the  ornamental  value  and  quality  of 
i .  A  j 

line. 


FORMATION    OF  LETTERS 

Regarding  line — the  useof  outline  from  the  point 
of  view  of  its  value  as  a  means  of  definition  of  form 
and  fact — its  power  is  really  only  limited  by  the 
power  of  draughtsmanship  at  the  command  of  the 
artist.  From  the  archaic  potters'  primitive  figures 
or  the  rudimentary  attempts  of  children  at  human 
or  animal  forms  up  to  the  most  refined  outlines  of 
a  Greek  vase-painter,  or  say  the  artist  of  the  Dream 
of  Poliphilus,  the  difference  is  one  of  degree.  The 
tyro  with  the  pen,  learning  to  write,  splotches  and 
scratches,  and  painfully  forms  trembling,  limping 
O's  and  A's,  till  with  practice  and  habitude,  almost 
unconsciously,  the  power  to  form  firm  letters  is 
acquired. 

Writing,  after  all,  is  but  a  simpler  form  of  draw- 
ing, and  we  know  that  the  letters  of  our  alphabet 
were  originally  pictures  or  symbols.  The  main 
difference  is  that  writing  stops  short  with  the  ac- 
quisition of  the  purely  useful  power  of  forming 
letters  and  words,  and  is  seldom  pursued  for  the 
sake  of  its  beauty  or  artistic  qualities  as  formerly  ; 
while  drawing  continually  leads  on  to  new  diffi- 
culties to  be  conquered,  to  new  subtleties  of  line, 
and  fresh  fascinations  in  the  pursuit  of  distinction 
and  style. 

The  practice  of  forming  letters  with  the  pen  or 
brush,  from  good  types,  Roman  and  Gothic,  how- 
ever, would  afford  very  good  preliminary  practice 
to  a  student  of  line  and  form.  The  hand  would 
acquire  directness  of  stroke  and 'touch,  while  the 
eye  would  grow  accustomed  to  good  lines  of  com- 
position and  simple  constructive  forms.  QThe  pro- 
gressive nature  of  writing — the  gradual  building 
up  of  the  forms  of  the  letters— and  the  necessity  of 

4 


FORMATION   OF   LETTERS 

dealing  with  recurring  forms  and  lines,  also,  would 
bear  usefully  upon  after  work  in  actual  design.  Al- 


PROPORTIONS    OF   ROMAN    CAPITAL    LETTERS     AND     METHOD    OF 
DRAWING  THEM  (FROM  ALBERT  DURER'S  "  GEOMETRICA  "). 

bert  Dtirer  in  his  "  Geometrica  "  gives  methods  on 
which  to  draw  the  Roman  capitals,  and  also  the 


PROPORTIONS  OF  LOWER-CASE  GERMAN  /TEXT  AND  METHOD  OF 
DRAWING  THE  LETTERS  (FROM  ALBERT  DURER'S  "GEO- 
METRICA"). 

black  letters,  building  the  former  upon  the  square 

•and    its  proportions,    the  thickness  of  the  down 

strokes  being  one-eighth  of  square,  the  thin  strokes 

5 


METHODS    OF    DRAWING  IN   LINE 
being  one-sixteenth,  and  the  serifs  being  turned  by 
circles  of  one-fourth  and  one-eighth  diameter.   The 
capital  O,  it  will  be  noted,  is  formed  of  two  circles 
struck  diagonally. 

Letters  may  be  taken  as  the  simplest  form  of 
definition  by  means  of  line.  They  have  been  re- 
duced through  centuries  of  use  from  their  primitive 
hieroglyphic  forms  to  their  present  arbitrary  and 
fixed  types,  though  even  these  fixed  types  are  sub- 
ject to  the  variation  produced  by  changes  of  taste 
and  fancy. 

But  when  we  come  to  unformulated  nature — to 
the  vast  world  of  complex  forms,  ever  changing 
their  aspect,  full  of  life  and  movement,  trees,  flowers, 
woods  and  waters,  birds,  beasts,  fishes,  the  human 
form — the  problem  how  to  represent  any  of  these 
forms,  to  express  and  characterize  them  by  means 
of  so  abstract  a  method  as  line-drawing,  seems  at 
first  difficult  enough. 

But  since  the  growth  of  perception,  like  the 
power  of  graphic  representation,  is  gradual  and 
partial,  though  progressive,  the  eye  and  the  mind 
are  generally  first  impressed  with  the  salient  fea- 
tures and  leading  characteristics  of  natural  forms, 
just  as  the  child's  first  idea  of  a  human  form  is  that 
of  a  body  with  four  straight  limbs,  with  a  prepon- 
derating head,  That  is  the  first  impression,  and 
it  is  unhesitatingly  recorded  in  infantine  outline. 

The  first  aim,  then,  in  drawing  anything  in  line 
is  to  grasp  the  general  truths  ^f^orm^character, 
and  expression^ 

There  are  various  methods  of  proceeding  in  get- 
ting an  outline  of  any  object  or  figure.  To  begin 
with,  the  student  might  begin  progressively  defin- 

6 


THE  PROGRESSIVE  METHOD 
ing  the  form  by  a  series  of  stages  in  this  way.  Take 
the  profile  of  a  bird,  for  instance  ;  the  form  might 
be  gradually  built  up  by  the  combination  of  a  series 
of  lines  : 


or  take  the  simpler  form  of  a  flask  bottle : 

2     II  3 

I 


or  a  jar  on  the  same  principle  : 
i 


or,  simpler  still,  a  leaf  form,  putting  in  the  stem 
first  with  one  stroke  (i)  : 


and  building  the  form  around  it  (2,  3). 

This  might  be  termed  the  calligrarjhic  method^of 
drawing;  and  in  this  method  facmtyof  hand  might 
b^-fthftter  practised  by  attempting  the  definition  of 
forms  by  continuous  strokes,  or  building  it  up  by 

7 


THE    CALLIGRAPHIC    METHOD 

as  lew  strokes  as  possible.     The  simpler  types  of 

ornament  consisting  of  meandering  and  flowing 


lines  can  all  be  produced  in  this  way,  i.e.,  by  con- 
tinuous line,  as  well  as  natural  forms  treated  in  a 


THE    TENTATIVE    METHOD 

certain  abstract  or  conventional  way,  which  adapts 
them  to  decoration. 


Another    method  is  to  sketch  in  lightly  guide 
lines  for  main  masses,  building  a  sort  of  scaffold- 


ing of  light  lines  to  assist  the  eye  in  getting  the 
correct  outline  in  its  place,  using  vertical  centre 
lines  for  symmetrical  forms  to  get  the  poise  right. 

9 


THE  JAPANESE  DIRECT  BRUSH  METHOD 
This  is  the  method  very  generally  in  use,  but  I 
thing  jt  very  desirable  to  practise  direct  drawing 
as  well,  to  acquire  certainty  of  eye  and  facility  of 
hand  ;  and  one  must  not  mind  failure  at  first,  as 
this  kind  of  power  and  facility  is  so  much  a  matter 
of  practice. 

The  Japanese,  who  draw  with  the  brush,  have 
accustomed  themselves  to  draw  in  a  direct  manner 
without  any  preliminary  sketching,  and  the  charm 
of  their  work  is  largely  owing  to  that  crisp  fresh- 
ness of  touch  only  possible  to  their  direct  method. 
The  great  object  is  to  establish  a  perfectly  inti- 
mate correspondence  between  eye  and  hand,  so 
that  the  latter  will  record  what  the  former  per- 
ceives. 

Abundant  specimens  of  the  freedom  and  natural- 
ism of  the  modern  school  of  Japanese  artists  in 
this  direct  brush  method  may  be  found  in  the 
work  of  Bari,Jjjroshio^i,  and  Hokusai,  and  in  the 
numerous  printiTand  books  of  designs  from  their 
hands.  To  all  draughtsmen  and  designers  they 
are  most  valuable  to  study  for  their  direct  method 
and  sjmpje^means  of  expression  of  form  and  f^rt. 
Accidental  as  they  frequently  seem  in  composition, 
the  placing  of  the  drawing  upon  the  paper  is  care- 
fully considered  before  starting,  and  this,  of  course, 
is  always  a  very  important  point. 

Yet  another  method  of  drawing,  more  especially 
in  relation  to  the  drawing  of  the  human  figure  and 
animal  forms,  I  may  mention  as  a  help  to  those 
who  do  not  feel  strong  enough  for  the  direct 
method.  At  the  same  time  it  must  be  borne  in 
mind  that  we  can  accustom  ourselves  totf/rj'method ; 
and  the  more  dependent  we  become  upon  a  single 

10 


THE  OVAL  AND  RECTANGULAR  METHODS 
method,  the  less  facility  we  shall  have  for  working 
in  any  other.  But  for  all  that  it  is  desirable  to 
master  one  method — that  is,  to  be  able  to  draw  in 


\vwtfreely  in  one  way  or  another— and  experience 
and  practice  alone  will  enable  us  to  find  the  method 
most  satisfactory. 

This  other  method  is  to  block  in  the  principal 

1 1 


THE  RECTANGULAR  METHOD 
masses  of  the  forms  we  desire  to  represent  by 
means  of  a  series  of  ovals,  as  shown  in  the  illus- 
tration, and  when  we  have  got  the  masses  in  their 
proper  relations,  to  proceed  to  draw  in  the  careful 
outline  of  the  figure,  or  whatever  it  may  be,  upon 
this  substructure  of  guiding  lines,  correcting  as  we 
go  along.  It  would  be  quite  possible  to  work  on 
the  same  principle,  but  upon  a  structure  of  more 
or  less  rectangular  masses.  The  real  use  of  the 
method  is  to  assist  the  student  to  get  a  grasp  of 
the  relation  of  the  masses  of  a  figure  and  a  sense 
of  structure  in  drawing  ;  whether  square  or  oval 
blocking  in  is  used  may  be  a  matter  of  choice.  It 
may  be  said  for  the  oval  forms  that  they  resemble 
the  contours  of  the  structure  in  human  and  animal 
forms. 

If  one  had  a  tendency  to  round  one's  forms  too 
much,  it  would  be  well  to  try  the  rectangular 
method  to  correct  this,  and  vice  versa. 

After  a  certain  facility  has  been  acquired  in 
rendering  form  by  means  of  line,  we  shall  perceive 
further  capacities  of  expression  in  its  use,  and 
begin  to  note  how  different  characteristics  of  form 
and  natural  fact  may  be  expressed  by  varying  the 
quality  of  our  outline. 

If  we  are  drawing  a  plant  or  a  flower,  for  in- 
stance, we  should  endeavour  to  show  by  the  quality 
of  our  line  the  difference  between  the  fine  springing 
curves  in  the  structure  of  the  lily,  the  solid  seed- 
centre  and  stiff  radiation  of  the  petals  of  the  daisy, 
and  the  delicate  silky  folds  of  the  poppy. 

But,  as  leaves  come  before  flowers,  it  would  be 
best  to  begin  with  leaf  forms  and  try  to  express 
the  character  of  oak  and  beech,  lime  and  chestnut 

12 


QUALITY   OF    LINE 

leaves,  for  instance,  by  means  of  outline.    Probably 
at  first  we  shall  feel  dissatisfied  with  our  outline 


LINES   OF   CHARACTERIZATION    IN    THE   FORM    AND   FEATURE   OF 
FLOWERS  :    LILY    AND    POPPY. 

as  not  being  full  enough  :  it  may  look  meagre  in 
quality   and    small    in  definition    of  form.     This 


QUALITY    OF    LINE 

probably  arises  from  not  allowing  enough  space— 
from  setting  the  outline  too  much  within  the 
boundary  of  the  form.  To  correct  this  one  cannot 
do  better  than  block  in  the  form  of  the  object  we 
are  drawing  (leaf,  flower,  or  figure)  with  a  full 
brush  in  black  silhouette,  placing  the  object  against 
the  light  or  white  paper,  so  that  its  true  boundary 
may  be  seen  uninterfered  with  by  surface  markings 


SILHOUETTE    OF    BEECH    LEAVES    AND    LINE    RENDERING    OF 
THE    SAME. 

or  shadows,  and,  concentrating  our  attention  upon 
the  edge,  follow  it  as  carefully  as  possible  with  the 
solid  black.  Then,  if  we  compare  the  result  with 
our  outline,  it  will  help  to  show  where  it  has  failed  ; 
and  the  practice  of  thus  blocking  in  with  the  brush 
in  solid  silhouette  will  tend  to  encourage  a  larger 
style  of  drawing,  since  good  outline  means  good 
perception  of  mass ;  ancfas  a  generaTprincTple  in 
drawing,  it^m1iyn5e~7ecommended  to  place  one's 


LINEAR  EXPRESSION  OF  MOVEMENT 
outline  outside  the  silhouette  boundary  of  the  form 
rather  than  within  it  ;  that  is  to  say,  when  the 
figure  or  object  is  relieved  in  light  against  dark,  as 
the  line  in  that  case  defines  the  edge  against  the 
background.  When  the  figure  or  object  appears 
as  dark  upon  a  light  ground,  however,  the  outline 
should  be  within  the  silhouette,  obviously,  or  its 
delicate  boundary  is  lost. 

Another  important  attribute  of  line  is  its  power 
of  expressing  or  suggesting  movement.    By  a  law  of 


•LINE5-OF  nOVLMLMT 

inseparable  association,  undulating  lines  approach- 
ing the  horizontal,  or  leading  down  to  it,  are  con- 
nected with  the  sense  of  repose  ;  whereas  broken 
curves  and  rectangular  lines  always  suggest  action 
and  unrest,  or  the  resistance  to  force  of  some  kind. 
The  recurrence  of  a  series  of  lines  in  the  same 
direction  in  a  kind  of  crescendo  or  wave-like 
movement  suggests  continuous  pressure  of  force 
in  the  same  direction,  as  in  this  series  of  instant- 
aneous actions  of  a  man  bowling,  where  the  line 
drawn  through  or  touching  the  highest  points  in 

15 


LINEAR  EXPRESSION  OF  MOVEMENT 
each  figure  takes  the  line  of  the  curve  of  a  wave. 
The  wave-line,  indeed,  may  be  said  not  only  to 
suggest  movement,  but  also  to  describe  its  direc- 
tion and  force.  It  is,  in  fact,  the  line  of  movement. 
The  principle  may  be  seen  in  a  simpler  way,  as 
Hogarth  points  out  in  his  "  Analysis  of  Beauty," 
by  observing  the  line  described  along  a  wall  by 
the  head  of  a  man  walking  along  the  street.  Or, 
as  we  may  see  sometimes  near  the  coast,  trees 
exposed  to  the  constant  pressure  of  the  wind  illus- 


trate  this  recurrence  of  lines  in  the  same  direction 
governing  their  general  shape  ;  and  as  each  tree 
is  forced  to  spread  in  the  direction  away  from  the 
wind,  the  effect  is  that  of  their  being  always  strug- 
gling against  its  pressure  even  in  the  calmest 
weather;  and  this  is  entirely  due  to  our  association 
of  wind-movement  with  this  peculiar  linear  ex- 
pression. 

Flowing  water,  again,  is  expressed  by  certain 
recurring  wave  lines,  which  remind  us  of  the  ancient 
linear  symbols  of  the  zigzag  and  meander  used 
from  the  earliest  times  to  express  water.  In  the 

16 


LINEAR  EXPRESSION  OF  MOVEMENT 
streams  that  channel  the  sands  of  the  sea-shore 
when  the  tide  recedes  we  may  see  beautiful  flow- 


ing lines,  sometimes  crossing  like  a  network,  and 
sometimes  running  into  a  series  of  shell-like  waves ; 
while  the  sands  themselves  are  ribbed  and  chan- 
nelled and  modelled  by  the  recurring  movement 

17  c 


LINEAR   EXPRESSION   OF   TEXTURES 

of  the  waves,  which  leave  upon  them  the  impress 

and  the  expression  of  their  motion  (much  as  in  a 

more  delicate  medium  the  air-currents  impress  the 

fields  of  cloud,  and  give  them  their  characteristic 

forms). 

Textures  and  surfaces,  too,  fall  within  the  range 
of  linear  expression.  One  would  naturally  use 
lines  of  totally  different  consistency  and  character 
to  express  rough  or  smooth  surfaces  :  to  express 
the  difference  of  value,  for  instance,  between  the 
ivory-like  smoothness  of  an  egg  and  the  scaly 
surface  of  a  pine-cone,  entirely  different  qualities 
of  line  are  obviously  wanted.  The  firm-set  yet 
soft  feathers  of  the  plumage  of  a  bird  must  be 
rendered  by  a  very  different  touch  from  the  shining 
scales  of  a  fish.  The  hair  and  horns  of  animals, 
delicate  human  features,  flowers,  the  sinuous  lines 
of  thin  drapery,  or  the  broad  massive  folds  of 
heavy  robes,  all  demand  from  the  designer  and 
draughtsman  in  line  different  kinds  of  suggestive 
expression,  a  translation  or  rendering  of  natural 
fact  subordinate  to  the  artistic  purpose  of  his  work, 
and  in  relation  to  the  material  and  purpose  for 
which  he  works. 

Then,  again,  when  we  come  to  the  expression 
of  ideas — of  thought  and  sentiment — we  find  in 
line  an  abstract  but  direct  medium  for  their  illus- 
tration ;  and  this  again,  too,  by  means  of  that  law  of 
inseparable  association  which  connects  the  idea  of 
praise  or  aspiration  and  ascension,  for  instance, 
with  long  lines  inclining  towards  the  severe  vert- 
ical, as  when  we  draw  a  figure  with  upraised 
hands;  while  the  feeling  might  be  increased  if  led  up 
to  or  re-echoed  by  other  groups  and  objects  in  the 

18 


LINEAR  EXPRESSION  OF  EMOTION 
composition,  forming  a  kind  of  vertical  crescendo 
on  the  same  principle  which  we  were  consider- 


LINES    OF    DIFFERENT   TEXTURES,    STRUCTURES,  AND  SURFACES. 

ing  in  regard  to  the  expression  of  lateral  movement. 
Few  things  in  design  are  finer  or  more  elevated  in 
feeling  than  William  Blake's  design  of  the  Morn- 
ing Stars  singing  together,  in  the  series  of  the  Book 

19 


LINEAR   EXPRESSION   OF   EMOTION 
of  Job,  yet  it  is  little  more  than  a  vertical  arrange- 
ment of  figures  with    uplifted   and    intercrossing 


EXPRESSION  OF  EMOTION  :  LINES  OF  EXALTATION  AND  REJOIC- 
ING IN  UNISON.  THE  MORNING  STARS,  AFTER  WILLIAM 
BLAKE.  (FROM  THE  BOOK  OF  JOB.) 

arms.      The  linear  plan  gives  the  main  impetus  to 
the  expressiveness  of  the  design,  and  is  the  basis 

20 


SCALE  OF  LINEAR  EXPRESSION 
of  the  beauty,  which  culminates  in  the  rapture  of 
the  fresh  youthful  faces. 

Bowed  and  bent  lines  tending  downwards,  on 
the  other  hand,  convey  the  opposite  ideas  of  de- 
jection and  despair.  This  is  illustrated  in  these 
figures  of  Flaxman's,  who  was  a  great  master  of 
style  in  outline. 

We  seem  here  to  discover  a  kind  of  scale  of 
linear  expression — the  two  extremes  at  either 


LINES    OF    GRIEF    AND    DEJECTION.       FLAX M AN  :    DtSIGNS    TO 
HOMER. 

end  :  the  horizontal  and  the  vertical,  with  every 
degree  and  modulation  between  them  ;  the  undu- 
lating curve  giving  way  to  the  springing  energetic 
spiral,  the  meandering,  flowing  line  sinking  to  the 
horizontal  :  or  the  sharp  opposition  and  thrust 
of  rectangular,  the  nervous  resistance  of  broken 
curves,  the  flame-like,  triumphant,  ascending  ver- 
ticals. Truly  the  designer  may  find  a  great  range 
of  expression  within  the  dominion  of  pure  line. 
Line  is,  indeed,  as  I  have  before  termed  it,  a 

21 


CAPACITY   OF   LINE 

language,  a  most  sensitive  and  vigorous  speech 
of  many  dialects  ;  which  can  adapt  itself  to  all 
purposes,  and  is,  indeed,  indispensable  to  all  the 
provinces  of  design  in  line.  Line  may  be  regarded 
simply  as  a  means  of  record,  a  method  of  register- 
ing the  facts  of  nature,  of  graphically  portraying 
the  characteristics  of  plants  and  animals,  or  the 
features  of  humanity  :  the  smooth  features  of 
youth,  the  rugged  lines  of  age.  It  is  capable  of 
this,  and  more  also,  since  it  can  appeal  to  our 
emotions  and  evoke  our  passionate  and  poetic 
sympathies  with  both  the  life  of  humanity  and 
wild  nature,  as  in  the  hands  of  the  great  masters 
it  lifts  us  to  the  heavens  or  bows  us  down  to 
earth  :  we  may  stand  on  the  sea-shore  and  see  the 
movement  of  the  falling  waves,  the  fierce  energy 
of  the  storm  and  its  rolling  armament  of  clouds, 
glittering  with  the  sudden  zigzag  of  the  lightning  ; 
or  we  may  sink  into  the  profound  calm  of  a  sum- 
mer day,  when  the  mountains,  defined  only  by 
their  edges,  wrapped  in  soft  planes  of  mist,  seem 
to  recline  upon  the  level  meadows  like  Titans  and 
dream  of  the  golden  age. 


22 


CHAPTER    II 

The  Language  of  Line — Dialects — Comparison  of  the  Style 
of  various  Artists  in  Line — Scale  of  Degrees  in  Line — Picture 
Writing — Relation  of  Line  to  Form — Two  Paths — The  Graphic 
Purpose— Aspect — The  Ornamental  Purpose — Typical  Treat- 
ment or  Convention — Rhythm — Linear  Plans  in  Pattern  De- 
signing— Wall-paper  Design — Controlling  Forms — Memory — 
Evolution  in  Design — Variety  in  Unity — Counterbalance — 
Linear  Logic — Recurring  Line  and  Form — Principle  of  Radia- 
tion— Range  and  Use  of  Line. 

I  SPOKE  of  Line  as  a  Language,  and  gave  some 
illustrations  of  its  power  and  range  of  expres- 
sion, showing  that  line  is  capable  not  only  of 
recording  natural  fact  and  defining  character,  but 
also  of  conveying  the  idea  of  movement  and  force, 
of  action  and  repose  ;  and,  further,  of  appealing 
to  our  emotions  and  thoughts  by  variations  and 
changes  in  its  direction,  the  degree  of  its  emphasis, 
and  other  qualities. 

Yet  every  designer  and  draughtsman  uses  line 
in  a  different  way,  and  of  a  different  quality,  ac- 
cording to  his  preference,  habit,  training,  or  person- 
ality. The  endless  variations  which  result  I  should 
—to  pursue  the  analogy  of  speech  further — term 
dialect^.  We  might  collect  abundant  examples 
of  these  from  the  work  of  line-designers  since  the 
world  began,  or  compare  the  methods  of  any  of 
the  popular  illustrators  of  to-day  to  find  constant 

23 


DIALECTS 

variations  and  individual  differences  occurring 
even  among  those  which  might  be  said,  under  the 
influence  of  a  prevailing  mode,  to  be  variations  of 
one  type. 

Compare  a  Greek  vase-painter's  delicate  brush 
line-drawing  with  the  bold  pen-line  of  Albert 
Dlirer  (to  get  a  contrast  in  historic  style).  Com- 
pare (to  take  two  masters  of  different  schools,  but 
of  the  same  country)  the  line-treatment  of  Man- 
tegna  with  the  line-treatment  of  Raphael  ;  or,  to 
take  another  jump,  compare  the  line-work  of  Blake 
and  Flaxman  ;  or,  to  take  a  modern  instance,  and 
to  come  to  our  own  contemporary  artists,  com- 
pare a  drawing  by  Burne-Jones  and  one  by  Phil 
May. 

We  might  construct  a  sort  of  scale  of  the  degrees 
and  qualities  of  line. 

There  is,  for  instance,  outline  of  every  degree 
of  boldness  or  fineness,  from  the  strong  black  half- 
inch  outline  and  upwards  used  in  mosaic-work 
and  stained-glass  leading ;  the  outline  of  the 
pattern  designer  for  block-printing  ;  the  outline 
of  the  pen  draughtsman  for  process-work  or  wood- 
cut ;  and  so  on,  down  to  the  hair-line  of  the  dry- 
point  etcher. 

There  are  the  qualities  of  line  in  different 
degrees  of  firmness,  roughness,  raggedness,  or 
smooth  and  flowing.  There  are  the  degrees  of 
direction  of  line,  curvilinear  or  angular.  On  the 
angular  side  all  variations  from  the  perpendicular 
and  horizontal,  or  rectangle,  within  which  we  may 
find  all  these  degrees,  and  on  the  curvilinear  side, 
all  the  variations  from  spiral  to  circle  :  so  that  we 
might  say  that  the  rectangle  was  the  cradle  of  all 

24 


SCALE  OF  DEGREES  IN  LINE 
angular  variations  of  line,  while  the  semicircle  was 
the  cradle  of  all  curvilinear  variations.  (See  the 
diagrams  on  p.  26.) 


PCH 


U 


line 


j_»nch. 

2. 


ron 


SCALE  OF  VARIOUS  DEGREES  OF  LINEAR  WEIGHT  AND  EMPHASIS. 

Every  artist,  sooner  or  later,  by  means  of  his 
selective   adaptive  sense,  finds  a  method  in  the 

25 


SCALE   OF   DEGREES  IN    LINE 
use  of  line  to  suit  his  own  personality — to  suit  his 
own  individual  aim  in  artistic  expression — and  in 
course  of  time  it  becomes  a  characteristic  manner, 


CURVILINEAR    AND    RECTANGULAR    SCALES    OF    DIRECTION. 

by  which  his  work  is  instantly  known,  like  a  friend's 
handwriting. 

Now  what  determines  this  choice,  this  personal 
selection,  over  and  above  necessities  of  method 
and  material,  it  would  be  difficult  to  say,  unless 

26 


RELATION  OF  LINE  TO  FORM 
we  had  more  minute  knowledge  of  the  natural 
history  of  a  human  being  than  we  are  likely  to 
possess.  We  can  only  say  that  from  practice  are 
evolved  certain  methods  or  principles,  consciously 
or  unconsciously ;  and  it  is  only  these  general 
methods  or  principles  that  can  be  ex-plained  and 
tested  for  the  benefit  of  those  essaying  to  follow 
the  arduous  and  difficult  path  of  art. 

At  the  outset  we  see  that  we  need  a  means  of 
definition  in  drawing,  just  as  a  child  needs  a  word 
to  express  a  thing  it  wants.  Line,  at  the  point  of 
the  pencil,  pen,  or  brush,  places  this  possibility  of 
definition  within  our  reach ;  but  before  we  can 
grasp  it  we  need  some  knowledge,  however  rudi- 
mentary, of  its  inseparable  companion,  Form. 

I  recall  two  innocent  and  entertaining  methods 
from  the  traditions  of  the  nursery,  which  appeal  at 
once  in  a  curious  way  to  both  the  oral  and  graphic 
senses,  and  unite  story  and  picture  in  one.  These 
are  illustrated  on  p.  28.  By  such  devices  a  child 
learns  to  associate  line  and  form,  unconsciously 
and  step  by  step  defining  form  in  the  use  of,  or 
pursuit  of,  line. 

It  would  be  very  entertaining  and  agreeable  if 
we  could  carry  the  principle  further,  and  get  a 
passable  study  from  the  antique,  for  instance,  by 
a  similar  process.  In  line-drawing  we  may,  how- 
ever, always  tell  some  story  or  fact,  or  character, 
phase,  or  idea. 

But  supposing  we  have  mounted  our  steed  Form, 
and  taken  our  bridle  Line  in  hand,  and  have 
started  riding  at  large  in  the  vast  domain  of  nature, 
with  the  primary  object  of  finding  and  hunting 
down  truth  at  last  ;  we  soon  perceive  that  there 

27 


HCTuRt    WRIT  INC   ACCORDING  TO    NUR.SLIO    1RADITION 

^mm m m^fm — m       *2  —  The  .f.'druiY/  <ai'#"  ^SI'AVVVI  u^nm.  ttie 

of  A.tv<Jc\3fYHtt\t    bei*£  «K^icate^ 
V  J  by  Th«  ^,t,^ocn        * 

I  XiX  I-  T^nThoma* 


STOFTf  I 


CHARLES 


'O 

STORY   II 
THE    LITTLE    A 
$C    HiS     HOU5C 
E.VTATC 


I«J.>X  ••  fVe     CooJ*"     •'*     cco*tei  " 
i  « ' 

2S 


^^      t,    qne*^    «xl».rt«i  — 


THE    GRAPHIC    PURPOSE 

are  so  many  truths,  or  rather  that  truth,  even  of 
natural  fact,  has  so  many  sides,  that  it  is  difficult  to 
make  up  our  mind  which  one  to  pursue.  Thought, 
however,  will  soon  discover  that  in  this  pursuit  of 
truth  we  strike  a  road  that  naturally  divides  itself, 
or  branches  out,  into  two  main  paths  distinct  in 
aim.  These  two  paths  in  art  have  been  called  by 
many  names  ;  they  occasionally  cross  each  other, 
or  overlap,  and  are  sometimes  blended,  or  even 
confused  ;  but  it  will  be  use  ul  for  our  present  pur- 
pose to  keep  them  very  distinct.  I  will  term  them, 
for  convenience  : 

1.  The  Graphic  Purpose.     (Accidental  form.) 

2.  The  Ornamental  Purpose.      (Typical  form.) 
Our  use  of  line  will  largely  depend  upon  which 

of  these  two  it  is  our  object  to  pursue.  Now  when 
we  look  at  anything  with  intent  to  draw — say  a 
leafy  bough  as  it  grows  in  the  sunshine — we  see 
great  complexity  of  form  and  surface-lighting. 
The  leaves,  perhaps,  take  all  manner  of  varia- 
tions of  the  typical  form,  and  are  set  at  all  sorts 
of  angles.  In  making  a  rapid  sketch  with  the 
object  of  getting  the  appearance  of  the  bough,  we 
naturally  dwrell  upon  these  accidents  and  super- 
ficial facts.  At  the  same  time,  with  nothing  but 
line  to  express  them,  we  are  compelled  to  use-a 
kind  oL-Coav_ejition,  though  our  aim  be  purely 
naturalistic,  to  get  a  faithful  portrait  of  the 
bough. 

We  must  make  our  line  as  descriptive  as  possible, 
defining  the  main  forms  boldly,  and  blocking  in 
broadly  the  main  masses  of  form  and  light  and 
shade.  We  are  now  aiming  at  the  general  look 
of  the  thing.  We  are  striving  to  grasp  the  facts 

29 


THE  GRAPHIC   PURPOSE 


OLIVE  BRANCH 
FROM  MATURE 


of  Aspect.     We   are   concerned   with   the   purely 
graphic  purpose,  to  make  a  picture  upon  paper. 
We  cannot,  however,  even  under  these  simple 

30 


THE   GRAPHIC  PURPOSE 

conditions,  altogether  leave  out  of  account  con- 
siderations which,  strictly  speaking,  must  be 
termed  "  decorative."  For  instance,  there  is  the 
question  of  placing  the  study  well  upon  the  paper, 
a  very  important  point  to  start  with ;  and  then  the 
question  of  beauty  must  arise,  not  only  in  the 
selection  of  our  point  of  view,  but  in  the  choice  of 
method,  in  the  treatment  of  line  we  adopt;  and  it 
does  not  follow  that  the  most  apparently  forcible 
way  of  getting  bold  projection  by  means  of  black 
shadows,  at  the  cost  of  the  more  delicate  char- 
acteristics of  our  subject,  is  the  best.  On  the 
contrary,  the  finest  draughtsmanship  is  always 
the  most  subtle  and  delicate,  and  one  cannot  get 
subtle  and  delicate  draughtsmanship  without  faith- 
ful study  and  careful  constant  practice — knowledge 
of  form,  in  short — and  I  am  afraid  there  is  no 
short  cut  to  it. 

Now  supposing  we  make  our  study  of  leaves, 
not  as  an  end  in  itself,  and  for  its  simple  pictorial 
values  or  qualities  only,  but  with  an  ornamental 
or  decorative  purpose  in  view,  intending  to  make 
use  of  its  form  and  character  in  some  more  or  less 
systematic  design  or  pattern-work — adapted  to 
special  methods  and  materials — intended  to  deco- 
rate a  wall-surface  or  a  textile,  for  instance  ;  we 
might  certainly  start  with  a  general  sketch  of  its 
appearance  as  before,  but  we  should  find  that  we 
should  want  to  understand  it  in  its  detail ;  the  law 
of  its  growth  and  construction  ;  we  should  want 
to  dwell  upon  its  typical  character  and  form,  the 
controlling  lines  of  its  masses,  rather  than  on  its 
accidental  aspects,  because  it  would  really  be 
only  with  these  that  we  could  successfully  deal  in 


THE   ORNAMENTAL  PURPOSE 

adapting  anything  in  nature  to  the  conditions  and 

limitations  of  a  design.     To  do  this  requires  as 


OLIVE.   BRANCH 
IN  DECOR 
TRE.ATAEMT 


much  art   as  to   make  a  clever  graphic   sketch, 
perhaps   more  ;    but  it  is  certainly  not  so  easily 

32 


THE  ORNAMENTAL  PURPOSE 
understood  and  appreciated,  as  a  rule.  Pattern- 
work  is  taken  so  much  for  granted,  except  by 


STUDY   OF-  MORME.D  POPPY 


those   technically   interested,  whereas    a    graphic 
sketch   may  bring  the   drama  of  nature,  and   of 

33  D 


ADAPTATION    OF   THE    HORNED    POPPY   IN   DESIGN 
VERTICAL    PANEL    FOR    NEEDLEWORK. 

34 


QUESTION  AND  ANSWER  IN  LINE 
human  character  and  incident,  before  our  eyes. 
It  does  not  require  us  to  stop  and  think  out  the 
less  obvious  meaning,  or  trace -the  invention  or 
grace  of  line,  to  appreciate  the  rhythmic,  silent 
music  which  the  more  formalized  and  abstract 
decorative  design  may  contain,  quite  apart  from 
the  forms  it  actually  represents. 

Here  we  discover  another  function  of  line.  For, 
directly  we  endeavour  to  construct  a  decorative 
design — that  is,  a  design  intended  to  a'dorn  or  to 
express  an  object  or  surface — we  find  that  we  must 
build  it  upon  some  sort  of  a  plan,  or  geometric 


controlling  network  or  scaffolding,  so  as  to  give  it 
unity,  rhythm,  and  coherence — especially  so  in  the 
case  of  repeating  designs.  Even  in  an  isolated 
panel  or  picture  the  necessity  of  this  linear  basis 
will  be  felt,  since  one  cannot  draw  a  line  or  define 
a  form  without  demanding  an  answer — that  is,  a 
corresponding,  re-echoing  line  or  mass. 

The  curve  (i.  Q)  is  a  proposition  or  question. 
It  is  answered  or  balanced  by  the  corresponding 
curve  (2.  A),  and  forms  the  basis  for  a  scroll 
design. 

The  five  radiating  lines  (i)  are  obviously  in- 
complete by  themselves,  but  if  we  add  another 

35 


WALL-PAPER   DESIGN 

four,  in  reverse  order,  (2)  we  get  a  centred  and 

symmetric  motive  of  an  anthemion  character. 

Take,  however,  a  wall-paper.  The  problem  is 
to  construct  a  design  pleasant  to  the  eye  in  line, 
form,  colour,  and  suggestion  ;  which  will  be  in- 
teresting in  detail,  and  yet  repeat  upon  a  wall- 
surface  without  flaw,  and  without  becoming  weari- 
some. Moreover,  one  which  will  lend  itself  to 


being  cut  upon  wood,  if  for  block-printing,  and 
which  may  be  reproduced  with  a  due  regard  to 
economy  of  means.  The  designer  may  have  a 
square  of  twenty-  one  inches  in  which  to  make  his 
design. 

A  useful  way  to  begin  with  is  to  rule  out  a  sheet 
of  paper  into  squares,  say  on  the  scale,  of  i^  inch 
to  the  foot,  and  upon  this  jot  down  your  first  ideas 
of  linear  arrangement  and  colour  motive,  and  get 

36 


WALL-PAPER    DESIGN 

the  general,  effect,  and  test  the  plan  of  repeats. 
When  you  are  satisfied  with  one,  enlarge  it  to  full 
size,  correct  and  amplify  it,  and  improve  it  in  form 
and  detail.  Changes  will  probably  be  found  neces- 


DIAGRAM    SHOWING    THE     USE     OF    A     GEOMETRIC    BASIS    IN 
DESIGNING    REPEATING    PATTERN. 

sary  in  drawing  it  upon  the  larger  scale,  sometimes 
additions,  sometimes  omissions.  Now  in  sketch- 
ing out  the  general  plan,  one  builds,  as  before  said, 
upon  some  basis  or  plan,  however  simple,  since 
one  cannot  put  a  simple  spot,  sprig,  or  spray  upon 

37 


CONTROLLING   FORMS 

paper  intending  to  repeat,  without  some  system  of 

connection  to  put  them  into  relation. 

In  designing  one's  sprig,  too,  the  best  plan  to 
secure  good  decorative  effect  is  to  see  that  its 
general  form  is  inclosed  or  bounded  by  an  agree- 
able linear  shape,  although  itself  not  actually 
visible.  Simple  leaf  and  flower  forms  are  gener- 
ally the  best  to  use  for  these  controlling  boundaries. 
Sprays  designed  on  this  principle  may  be  relied 
upon  for  repeating  pleasantly  and  safely  when 
they  are  placed  upon,  and  connected  by,  the  con- 
trolling geometric  plan.  A  good  practical  test  of 
the  truth  and  completeness  of  your  square  repeat 
is,  when  the  design  is  done,  or  even  in  progress, 
to  cut  it  into  four  equal  parts  (supposing  it  to  be  a 
twenty-one  inch  square).  This  will  enable  you 
to  get  the  joints  true,  and  also,  by  altering  the 
position  of  the  squares,  to  give  you  a  very  good 
idea  of  the  effect  of  the  repeat  full  size.  (See  the 
diagrams  on  p.  41.) 

These  things  must  be  considered,  of  course, 
merely  as  practical  aids  to  invention  :  not  by  any 
means  as  substitutes  for  it.  One  cannot  give  any 
recipe  for  designing,  and  no  rules,  principles,  or 
methods  can  supply  the  place  of  imagination  and 
fancy.  "  He  who  would  bring  back  health  from 
the  Indies,"  says  an  old  proverb,  "  must  take  it  out 
with  him." 

At  the  same  time  the  imagination  can  be  en- 
feebled by  starvation  and  neglect.  It  can  be 
depressed  by  dull  and  sordid  surroundings.  It 
is  apt  to  grow,  like  other  living  things,  by  what 
it  feeds  on,  and  is  stronger  for  exercise  and  de- 
velopment. 

38 


MEMORY 

Memory,  too,  is  an  important  and  serviceable 
thing  in  designing,  and  this,  again,  can  be  culti- 
vated to  an  almost  unlimited  extent.  I  mean  that 
selective  kind  of  memory  which,  by  constant  and 
close  observation,  extracts  and  stores  up  the  essen- 
tial serviceable  kind  of  facts  for  the  designer  : 


USE   OF    CONTROLLING    BOUNDARIES    IN    DESIGNING    SPRAYS 

facts  of  form,  of  structure,  of  movement  of  figures, 
expressive  lines,  momentary  or  transitory  effects 
of  colour — all  those  rare  and  precious  visual 
moments  which  will  not  wait,  and  which  happen 
unexpectedly.  They  should  be  captured  like  rare 
butterflies  and  carefully  stored  in  the  mind's 
museum  of  suggestions,  as  well  as,  as  far  as  is 

39 


EVOLUTION    IN    DESIGN 

possible,  pinned  down  in  the  hieroglyphics  of  the 

note-book. 

As  regards  procedure  in  working  out  a  design, 
one  generally  thinks  of  some  leading  feature,  some 
central  mass  or  form  or  curve — of  a  figure  or 
a  flower,  say — and  one  thinks  of  its  capacity  in 
repeat ;  and,  since  one  form  or  line  should  in- 
evitably suggest  or  necessitate — as  by  a  kind  of 
logic — another,  one  adds  other  forms  until  the  de- 
sign is  complete.  For  it  must  never  be  forgotten 
that  design  is  a  growth  which  has  its  own  stages 
of  evolution  in  the  mind,  answering  to  the  evolu- 
tion of  the  living  forms  of  nature — first  the  blade, 
then  the  ear,  after  that  the  full  corn  in  the  ear. 

Experience  teaches  us  that  the  most  harmonious 
arrangements  of  form  and  line  are  those  in  which 
the  leading  lines  and  forms  through  all  sorts  of 
variations,  continually  recur,  We  cannot  place  a 
number  of  sliarply  contrasting  and  contradictory 
forms  together  in  design  satisfactorily — at  least 
we  cannot  do  so  without  recourse  to  other  elements 
to  harmonize  and  to  bring  them  into  relation.  For 
instance,  we  might  get  a  gieat  deal  of  ornamental 
variety  by  means  of  a  number  of  heraldic  devices 
upon  shields,  full  in  themselves  of  quaintness  and 
contrasts,  butbroughtintoharmony  by  the  boundary 
lines  of  the  shields  and  the  divisions ;  or,  still 
further,  by  throwing  them  upon  a  background  of 
leaves  and  stems,  the  meandering  lines  and  recur- 
ring forms  of  which  would  answer  as  a  kind  of 
warp  upon  which  to  weave  the  heraldic  spots  into 
a  connected  and  harmonious  pattern. 

But  even  in  the  ornamental  treatment  of  diverse 
forms,  as  the  mediaeval  heraldic  designers  were 

40 


_  J 


METHOD    OF    TESTING    A    REPEATING    PATTERN. 
41 


VARIETY   IN    UNITY 

well  aware,  they  can  be  brought  into  decorative 
harmony  by  following  a  similar  principle  to  the  one 
already  laid  down  in  regard  to  the  designing  of 
sprigs  and  sprays  :  that  is  to  say,  that  in  designing 


S&fi&Kaf* 


SKETCH  TO  SHOW  HOW  A  PATTERN  OF  DIVERSE  ELEMENTS 
MAY  BE  HARMONIZED  BY  UNITY  OF  INCLOSING  AND  IN- 
TERMEDIARY LINES. 

an  animal  or  figure  for  heraldry  or  introduction 
into  a  pattern,  one  should  arrange  it  so  that  it 
should  fall  within  the  boundary  of  some  geometric 
or  foliated  form,  square,  circular,  elliptical  or  other- 

42 


COUNTERBALANCE 


THE  PRINCIPLE 
OF  COUNTER  ' 
BALANCF  IN 
DIFFERENT  srs< 


DIAGONAL 


ALTERNATE 


DIAGONAL 


MOR.\ZONTAU 


wise,  as  might  be  desirable.     To  this,  however,  I 
hope  to  return  in  a  future  chapter. 

We  may  here  consider  another  important  prin- 

43 


COUNTERBALANCE 

ciple   in   designing  with    line  and   mass,   that   of 

counterbalance. 

Take  any  defined  space  as  a  panel,  tile,  or  border 
to  be  filled  with  design  :  you  place  your  principal 
mass,  and  instantly  feel  that  it  must  be  balanced 
by  a  corresponding  mass,  or  some  equivalent. 
Its  place  will  be  determined  by  the  principle  upon 
which  the  design  is  built.  If  on  a  symmetrical 
arrangement,  you  find  your  centre  (say  of  a  panel), 
and  you  may  either  throw  the  chief  weight  and 
mass  of  the  design  upon  the  central  feature  (as  a 
tree),  and  balance  it  by  smaller  forms  or  wings 
each  side,  or  vice  versa;  or,  adopting  a  diagonal 
plan,  you  place  your  principal  mass  (say  it  is  a  tile) 
near  the  top  left-hand  corner  (suppose  it  is  a  pome- 
granate), connecting  it  with  a  spiral  diagonal  line 
(the  stem) ;  the  place  of  the  counterbalancing  mass 
(the  second  pomegranate)  is  obviously  near  the 
bottom  right-hand  corner  of  the  square.  You  may 
then  feel  the  necessity  for  additional  smaller  forms, 
and  so  add  to  it  (the  leaves),  completing  the  de- 
sign. (See  preceding  page.) 

On  the  same  principle  one  may  design  upon 
various  other  plans.  The  exact  choice  of  the  dis- 
tribution of  the  counterbalancing  masses  must 
always  be  a  matter  of  personal  feeling,  judgment, 
and  taste,  controlled  by  the  perception  of  certain 
logical  necessities  :  as  it  seems  to  me  that  design- 
ing is  a  species  of  linear  reasoning,1  and  might 
almost  be  worked  in  its  elementary  stages  on  the 
principle  of  the  syllogism,  consisting  of  two  pro- 
positions and  a  conclusion.  A  spiral  curve  is  a 

1  I  recall  here  a  saying  of  Sir  E.  Burne-Jones,  that  "  a  bad 
line  can  only  be  answered  by  a  good  line." 

44 


LINEAR   LOGIC 

harmonious  line,  says  the  designer :  repeat  it, 
reversed,  and  you  prolong  the  harmony  ;  repeat  it 
again,  with  variations,  and  you  complete  the 
harmony.  Or,  harmonious  effect  is  produced  by 
recurring  form  and  line.  Here  is  a  circular  form  ; 
here  is  a  meandering  line  :  combine  and  repeat 
them,  and  you  get  a  logical  and  harmonious  border 
motive. 


O 


BORDER    UNITS    AND    BORDER    MOTIVE. 

The  everlastingly  recurring  egg  and  dart  mould- 
ing and  the  volute  are  instances  of  the  harmonious 
effect  of  very  simple  arrangements  of  recurring 
line  and  form.  We  also  get  illustrated  in  these 
another  linear  quality  in  design—  that  up-and-down 
movement  which  gives  a  pleasant  rhythm  to  the 

45 


RECURRING  LINE  AND  FORM 
simplest  border,  and  is  of  especial  consequence  in 
all  repeating  border  and  frieze  designs.  The 
borders  of  early,  ancient,  and  classical  art  might 
be  said  to  be  little  besides  rhythmical  and  logical 
arrangements  of  line.  The  same  rhythmical  prin- 
ciple is  found  in  the  designs  of  the  classical  frieze 
in  all  its  varieties,  culminating  in  the  rhythmic 
movement  of  the  great  Pan-Athenaic  procession 
in  that  master-frieze  of  the  Parthenon,  which, 


RECURRING    LINE    AND    FORM    IN    BORDER    MOTIVES. 

though  full  of  infinite  variety  and  delicate  sculp- 
tured detail,  is  yet  controlled  by  a  strictly  orna- 
mental motive,  and  constructed  upon  the  rhythmic 
recurrence  of  pure  line. 

Another  great  linear  principle  in  design  is  what 
is  known  as  the  radiating  principle,  which  gives 
vitality  and  vigour  alike  to  both  arrangements  of 
line  and  delineations  of  form.  It  is  emphatically 
and  abundantly  illustrated  in  natural  forms,  from 
the  scallop  shell  upon  the  sea-shore  to  the  sun 

46 


THE  PRINCIPLE  OF  RADIATION 
himself  that  radiates  his  light  upon  it.  The  palm- 
leaf  in  all  its  graceful  varieties  demonstrates  its 
beauty,  its  constructive  strength  combined  with 
extraordinary  lightness,  which  becomes  domesti- 
cated in  that  fragile  sceptre  of  social  influence  and 
festivity,  the  fan,  and  which  again  spreads  its 
silken,  or  gossamer,  wing  as  a  suggestive  field  for 
the  designer.  We  find  the  principle  springing  to 
life  again  in  the  fountain  jet,  and  symbolical  of 
life  as  it  has  ever  been  ;  by  means  of  the  same 
principle  applied  to  construction  the  Gothic  archi- 
tects raised  their  beautiful  vaults,  and  emphasized 
the  structural  principle  and  the  beauty  of  recur- 
ring line  by  moulding  the  edges  of  their  ribs  ; 
while  we  have  but  to  look  at  the  structure  of  the 
human  frame  to  find  the  same  principle  there  also, 
in  the  fibres  of  the  muscles,  for  instance,  the  radia- 
tion of  the  ribs,  and  of  the  fingers  and  toes. 

In  truth,  as  I  have  said,  if  there  can  be  said  to 
be  one  principle  more  than  another,  the  perception 
and  expression  of  which  gives  to  an  artist's  work 
in  design  peculiar  vitality,  it  is  this  principle  of 
radiating  line.  One  may  follow  it  through  all 
stages  and  forms  of  drawing  and  design,  and  it 
is  equally  important  in  the  design  of  the  figure,  in 
the  structure  of  a  flower,  in  the  folds  of  drapery, 
and  alike  in  the  controlling  lines  of  pictorial  compo- 
sition and  decorative  plan,  whether  the  lines  radiate 
from  seen  or  from  hidden  centres,  which  in  all 
kinds  of  informal  design  are  perhaps  the  most 
important. 

We  see,  therefore,  that  line  possesses  a  con- 
structive and  controlling  function,  in  addition  to 
its  power  of  graphic  expression  and  decorative 

47 


RANGE   AND    USE    OF   LINE 

definition.      It  is   the  beginning  and  the   end  of 

art.     By   means   of   its   help   \ve   guide   our  first 


tottering  steps  in  the  wide  world  of  design  ;  and, 
as  we  gain  facility  of  hand  and  travel  further  afield, 
we  discover  that  we  have  a  key  to  unlock  the 


RANGE   AND   USE   OF   LINE 

wonders  of  art  and  nature,  a  method  of  conjuring 
up  all  forms  at  will  :  a  sensitive  language  capable 


of  recording  and  revealing  impressions  and  beau- 
ties of  form  and  structure  hidden  from  the  careless 
a  delicate  instrument  which  may  catch  and 
49  E 


eye 


RANGE   AND    USE    OF   LINE 

perpetuate  in  imperishable  notation  unheard  har- 
monies :  a  staff  to  lean  upon  through  the  journey 
of  life  :  a  candid  friend  who  never  deceives  us  : 
perchance  a  divining  rod,  which  may  ultimately 
reveal  to  us  that  Beauty  and  Truth  are  one— as 
they  certainly  are,  or  ought  to  be,  in  the  world 
of  art. 


RADIATING  LINE  IN  ARCHITECTURAL  CONSTRUCTION  I    VAULTING 
OF    CHAPTER    HOUSE,    WESTMINSTER. 


CHAPTER    III 

Of  the  Choice  and  Use  of  Line — Degree  and  Emphasis — 
Influence  of  the  Photograph — The  Value  of  Emphasis — The 
Technical  Influence — The  Artistic  Purpose — Influence  of 
Material  and  Tools— Brush-work — Charcoal — Pencil — Pen. 

RECOGN IZ I NG  the  great  range  and  capacity 
of  line  as  a  means  of  expression,  and  also  the 
range  of  choice  it  presents  to  the  designer  and 
draughtsman,  the  actual  exercise  of  this  choice  of 
line,  with  a  view  to  the  most  expressive  and 
effective  use  in  practice,  becomes,  of  course,  of 
the  first  consequence. 

In  this  matter  of  choice  we  are  helped  by  natural 
bias,  by  personal  character  and  preferences,  for 
which  it  would,  as  I  have  said,  be  difficult  fully  to 
account;  but  beyond  this  a  kind  of  evolution  goes 
on,  arising  out  of  actual  practice,  which  controls 
and  is  controlled  by  it.  Draw  simply  a  succession 
of  strokes  with  any  point  upon  paper,  and  we  find 
that  we  are  gradually  led  to  repeat  a  particular 
kind  of  stroke,  a  particular  degree  of  line,  partly 
perhaps  because  it  seems  to  be  produced  with 
more  ease,  and  partly  because  it  appears  to  have 
the  pleasantest  effect. 

By  a  kind  of  "  natural  selection,"  therefore,  in- 
fluenced no  doubt  by  many  small  secondary  causes, 
such  as  the  relation  of  the  particular  angle  of  the 

51 


CHOICE   OF   LINE 


LINES    OF   CHARACTERIZATION. 


hand  and  pencil-point  to  the  surface — the  nature 
of  the  point  itself  and  the  nature  of  the  surface — 
we  finally  arrive  at  a  choice  of  line.  This  choice, 

52 


USE  OF  LINE 

again,  will  be  liable  to  constant  variation,  owing 
to  the  nature  of  the  object  we  are  about  to  draw, 
or  the  kind  of  design  we  want  to  make. 

The  kind  of  line  which  seems  appropriate  to 
representing  the  delicate  edges  of  a  piece  of  low- 
relief  sculpture,  for  instance,  would  require  greater 
force  and  firmness  if  we  wanted  to  draw  an  antique 
cast  in  the  round,  and  in  strong  light  and  shade. 
The  character  of  our  line  should  be  sympathetic 
with  the  character  of  our  subject  as  far  as  possible, 
and  sensitive  to  its  differences  of  character  and 
surface,  since  it  is  in  this  sensitiveness  that  the 
expressive  power  and  peculiar  virtue  of  line-draw- 
ing consists. 

A  feather,  a  lily,  a  scallop  shell,  all  show  as  an 
essential  principle  of  their  form  and  construction 
the  radiating  line ;  but  what  a  different  quality  of 
line  would  be  necessary  to  express  the  differences  of 
each  :  for  the  soft,  yet  firm,  smooth  flowing  curves 
of  the  feather  fibres  no  line  would  be  too  delicate ; 
and  the  lily  would  demand  no  less  delicacy,  and 
even  greater  precision  and  firmness  of  curve,  while 
a  slight  waviness,  or  quiver,  in  the  lines  might 
express  the  silken  or  waxy  surface  of  the  petals; 
while  a  crustier,  more  rugged,  though  equally  firm 
line  would  be  wanted  to  follow  the  rigid  furrows 
and  serrated  surface  of  the  shell.  The  leaves  01 
trees  and  plants  of  all  kinds,  which  perhaps  afford 
the  best  sort  of  practice  in  line-drawing  at  first, 
present  in  their  varieties  of  structure,  character, 
and  surfaces  continual  opportunities  for  the  exer- 
cise of  artistic  judgment  in  the  choice  and  use 
of  line. 

The  forms  and  surfaces  of  fruits,  again,  are  ex- 

53 


USE   OF   LINE 

cellent  tests  of  line  draughtsmanship,  and  their 
study  is  a  good  preparation  for  the  more  subtle 
and  delicate  contours  of  the  human  form — the 
greatest  test  of  all.  Here  we  see  firmness  of 
fundamental  structure  (in  the  bones)  and  surface 
curve  (of  sinew  and  muscle),  with  a  mobile  and 
constantly  changing  surface  (of  flesh  and  sensitive 
skin).  To  render  such  characteristics  without 
tending  to  overdo  either  the  firmness  or  the  mo- 


PEN    DRAWING    OF    FRUIT. 

bility,  and  so  to  become  too  rigid  on  the  one  hand, 
or  too  loose  and  indefinite  on  the  other,  requires 
extraordinary  skill,  knowledge,  and  practice  in 
the  use  of  line.  I  do  not  suppose  the  greatest 
master  ever  satisfied  himself  yet  in  this  direc- 
tion. 

When  we  have  settled  upon  our  quality  of  line 
and  its  degree — thick  or  thin,  bold  or  fine — we  shall 
be  met  with  the  question  of  emphasis,  for  upon 
this  the  ultimate  effect  and  expression  of  our 

54 


DEGREE    AND    EMPHASIS 

drawing  or  design  must  largely  depend.  In  the 
selection  of  any  subject  we  should  naturally  be 
influenced  by  the  attractiveness  of  particular  parts, 
characters,  or  qualities  it  might  possess,  and  we 
should  direct  our  efforts  towards  bringing  these 
out,  as  the  things  which  impress  us  most.  That 
is  the  difference  between  the  mind  and  hand  work- 
ing together  harmoniously  and  the  sensitized  plate 
in  the  photographic  camera,  which,  uncontrolled 
in  any  way  by  human  choice  (and  even  under 
that  control  as  it  always  is  to  some  extent),  me- 
chanically registers  the  action  of  the  light  rays 
which  define  the  impress  of  natural  forms  and 
scenes  through  the  lens  focussed  upon  the  plate. 
So  that,  as  we  often  see  in  a  photograph,  some 
unimportant  or  insignificant  detail  is  reproduced 
with  as  much  distinctness  (or  more)  as  are  the 
leading  figures  or  whatever  form  the  interesting 
features  or  the  motive  of  the  subject.  The  picture 
suffers  from  want^of  emphasis,  or  from  emphasis 
in^thg'wfoiigf  place.  It  is,  of  course,  here  that  the 
artToTthe  photographer  comes  in  ;  and,  although 
he  can  by  careful  selection,  arrangement,  and  the 
regulation  of  exposure,  largely  counteract  the 
mechanical  tendency,  a  ph 


nature  can  ngyerjtake  the^place  of  a  work  oLart=r 
the  first-hand  expression,  more  or  less  abstract,  of 
a  human  mind,  or  the  creative  inner  vision  recorded 
by  a  human  hand. 

Photography  does  wonders,  and  for  certain 
qualities  of  light  and  shade,  and  form  and  effect 
without  colour,  no  painting  or  drawing  can  ap- 
proach it  ;  but  it  has  the_  value  and  interesfc-ef 
science  rather  than  of  'art.  It  is  invaluable  to  the 

55 


INFLUENCE  OF  THE  PHOTOGRAPH 
student  of  natural  fact,  surface  effect,  and  momen- 
tary action,  and  is  often  in  its  very  failures  most 
interesting  and  suggestive  to  artists — who  indeed 
have  not  been  slow  to  avail  themselves  of  the  help 
of  photography  in  all  sorts  of  ways.  Indeed  the 
wonder  is,  considering  its  services  to  art  in  all 
directions,  how  the  world  could  ever  have  done 
without  it. 

But  a  photograph  cannot  do  everything.  It 
cannot  make  original  designs,  and  it  cannot  draw 
in  line.  You  can  design  in  the  solid,  and  make 
your  groups  in  the  studio  or  the  open  air  ;  you  can 
select  your  point  of  view,  and  the  photograph  will 
reproduce.  You  can  make  your  drawing  in  line, 
and  it  will  copy  it ;  and  we  know  its  sphere  of 
usefulness  in  this  direction  is  enormous,  since  it 
can  bring  before  our  eyes  the  whole  range  of 
ancient  art. 

In  short,  photography  is  an  excellent  servant 
and  friend,  but  a  dangerous  master.  It  may  easily 
beguile  us  by  its  seductive  reproductions  of  surface 
relief  and  lighting  to  think  more  of  these  qualities 
than  any  other,  and  to  endeavour  to  put  them  in 
the  wrong  places — in  places  where  we  want  colour 
planes  rather  than  shadow  planes,  flatness  and 
repose  rather  than  relief  for  instance,  as  mostly 
in  surface  decoration. 

But  one  way  of  learning  the  value  of  emphasis 
is  to  draw  from  a  photograph,  and  it  will  soon  be 
discovered  what  a  difference  in  expression  is  pro- 
duced by  dwelling  a  little  more  here,  or  a  little 
less  there. 

In  designing,  the  use  of  emphasis  is  very  im- 
portant ;  and  it  may  be  sai'd  that  drawing  or  de- 

56 


THE  VALUE  OF  EMPHASIS 

signing  without  emphasis  is  like  reading  without 
stops,  while  awkward  emphasis  is  like  putting  your 
stops  in  the  wrong  place. 

By  a  difference  in  emphasis  the  same  design 
may  be  given  quite  a  different  effect  and  expres- 
sion. 

Suppose,  for  instance,  we  were  designing  a  ver- 
tical pattern  of  stem,  leaves,  and  fruit  in  one  colour. 


EFFECT    OF    DIFFERENT    EMPHASIS    IN    THE    TREATMENT    OF 
THE    SAME    DESIGN. 

By  throwing  the  emphasis  upon  the  leaves,  as  in 
No.  i,  we  should  gain  one  kind  of  effect  or  decor- 
ative expression.  By  throwing  the  emphasis  upon 
the  fruit,  and  leaving  the  leaves  in  outline,  we 
should  get  quite  a  different  effect  out  of  the  same 
elements,  as  in  No.  2.  While  by  leaving  stem, 
leaves,  and  fruit  all  in  outline,  and  throwing  the 
emphasis  upon  the  ground,  we  should  get,  again, 
a  totally  distinct  kind  of  effect  and  expression. 
Similar  differences  of  effect  and  expression, 

57 


THE   VALUE    OF    EMPHASIS 

owing  to  differences  of  emphasis,  might  be  studied 
in  the  drawing  and  treatment  of  a  head  (as  in  A,  B, 
and  c).  The  possibilities  of  such  variations  of 
emphasis  in  drawing  are  practically  unlimited  and 
co-extensive  with  the  variations  of  expression  we 
see  in  nature  herself.  The  pictorial  artist  is  free 
to  translate  or  represent  them  in  his  work,  con- 
trolled solely  by  the  conditions  and  purpose  of 
his  work. 

It  is  these  conditions  and  purposes  which  really 
control  both  choice  and  treatment,  and  determine 


DIFFERENT    EMPHASIS    IN    THE    TREATMENT    OF    A    HEAD. 

the  emphasis,  and  therefore  the  expression  of  the 
work. 

No  kind  of  art  can  be  said  to  be  unconditioned, 
and  the  simplest  and  freest  of  all,  the  art  of  the 
point  and  the  surface^  which  covers  all  the  graphic 
art  and  flat  designing,  is  still  subject  to  certain 
technical  influences,  and  it  may  be  said  that  it  is 
very  much  in  so  far  as  these  technical  influences 
or  conditions  are  acknowledged  and  utilized  that 
the  work  gains  in  artistic  character. 

The  draughtsman  in  line  who  draws  for  surface 
printing,  for  the  book  or  newspaper,  should  be  able 
to  stand  the  test  of  the  peculiar  conditions  ;  and,  so 

58 


THE  TECHNICAL  INFLUENCE 
far  from  attempting  to  escape  them,  and  seeking 
something  more  than  they  will  bear,  should  welcome 
them  as  incentives  to  a  distinct  artistic  treatment 
with  a  value  and  character  of  its  own,  which  indeed 


SKETCHES    TO    ILLUSTRATE   EFFECT  OF  DIFFERENT    EMPHASIS  IN 
THE    TREATMENT    OF    THE    SAME    ELEMENTS    IN   LANDSCAPE. 

all  the  best  work  has.  It  is,  for  instance,  import- 
ant in  all  design  associated  with  type  for  surface 
printing,  that  there  should  be  a  certain  harmonious 
relation  between  lettering  or  type  and  printer's 
ornament  or  picture. 

59 


HE 


WHO  -\KJRKS-SR; 


BOOK-  OR-  THE 

,  5houM  It  able  to  fond. 
the  test*  of  the  peculiar  condition^ 
ani,So  far  from  5eekufc£  to  escape 
Ha^m  and  attempt  ^omc%iW  bej/ona 
their  limite,  Vie  ^houldl  ratfci^  Welcome 
tfajsm  a*  incetih'vcs  1b  ^  dj5tin<if  artfc 
t?C  fr^ahncn^  with,  a  value  and  char- 
acter of  ito  own.  ^^•fc^'fc.usrx^ 

WE  sKoulcl  3eck  ac  certnin  li 
=€8^  elation.  l>etvt^en  ike  om 
or  picture    and  ths  letter^ 
OT  type  with  -which 
printed.  .  J^T  v  .-cr  TSL  jzr 


EXAMPLE   OF    PAGE    TREATMENT   TO    SHOW    ORNAMENTAL 

RELATION    BETWEEN    TEXT    AND    PICTURES. 

60 


*rt*  "id.    '  ig*J'« 

I.    TEXTILE    MOTIVE  :    SUGGESTION    FOR    A    CARPET    PATTERN. 

II.    AN    ABSTRACT   TREATMENT  OF   THE    SAME    ON    POINT    PAPER, 

AS    DETAIL    OF    BRUSSELS   CARPET. 

6l 


THE   TECHNICAL    INFLUENCE 

A  firm  and  open  quality  of  line,  with  bright  black 
and  white  effects,  not  only  has  the  most  attractive 
decorative  effect  with  type,  but  lends  itself  to  the 
processes  of  reproduction  for  surface  printing  best, 
whether  woodcut  or  one  of  the  numerous  forms  of 
so-called  automatic  photo-engraving,  as  well  as  to 
the  conditions  of  the  printing  press. 

In  all  design-work  which  has  to  be  subjected  to 
processes  of  engraving  and  printing,  clearness  and 
definiteness  of  line  is  very  necessary.  Designs  for 
textile  printing  of  all  kinds,  for  wall-papers,  especi- 
ally, require  good  firm  drawing  and  definite  colour 
planes.  This  does  not,  however,  mean  hardness 
of  effect.  A  design  should  be  clear  and  intelligible 
without  being  hard. 

For  weaving,  again,  definiteness  in  pattern  de- 
signing is  very  necessary,  since  the  design  must  be 
capable  of  being  rendered  upon  the  severe  condi- 
tions of  the  point  paper,  by  which  it  is  only  possible 
to  produce  curves  by  small  successive  angles  (which 
sounds  like  a  contradiction  in  terms).  The  size  of 
these  angles  or  points,  of  course,  varies  very  much 
in  the  different  kinds  of  textile  with  which  pattern 
is  incorporated,  from  the  fine  silk  fabric,  in  which 
they  are  almost  inappreciable,  to  carpets  of  all  kinds, 
where  they  are  emphatic  ;  so  that  a  certain  square- 
ness of  mass  becomes  a  desirable  and  character- 
istic feature  in  designs  for  these  purposes,  and, 
indeed,  I  think  it  should  be  more  or  less  acknow- 
ledged in  all  textile  design,  in  order  to  preserve  its 
distinctive  beauty  and  character. 

Beauty  and  character. — In  these  lies  the  gist  of 
all  design.  While  the  technical  conditions,  if  fully 
understood,  fairly  met,  and  frankly  acknowledged, 

62 


THE  ARTISTIC  PURPOSE 

are  sure  to  give  character  to  a  design,  for  whatever 
purpose,  beauty  is  not  so  easy  .to  command.  It  is 
so  delicate  a  quality,  so  complex  in  its  elements,  a 
question  often  of  such  nice  balance  and  judgment 
—depending  perhaps  upon  a  hair's-breadth  differ- 
ence in  the  poise  of  a  mass  here,  or  the  sweep  of  a 
curve  there — that  we  cannot  weave  technical  nets 
fine  enough  to  catch  so  sensitive  a  butterfly.  She 
is  indeed  a  Psyche  in  art,  both  seeking  and  sought, 
to  be  finally  won  only  by  devotion  and  love. 

This  search  for  beauty — this  Psyche  of  art — is 
the  purely  inspiring  artistic  purpose,  as  distinct 
from  the  technical  and  useful  one,  which  should, 
perfectly  reconciled  and  united  with  it,  determine 
the  form  of  our  work. 

In  drawing  or  design  we  may  seek  particular 
qualities  in  line  and  form  either  of  representation 
or  of  ornament.  We  may  desire  to  dwell  upon 
particular  beauties  either  of  object  or  subject.  Say, 
in  drawing  from  a  cast  or  from  natural  form  of  any 
kind,  we  desire  to  dwell  upon  beauty  of  line  or 
^  quality  of  surface.  Well,  since  it  is  most  difficult, 
if  not  impossible,  to  get  everything  at  once,  and 
nothing  without  some  kind  of  sacrifice,  we  shall 
find  that  to  give  prominence  to— to  bring  out — the 
particular  quality  in  our  subject  (say  beauty  of  line), 
it  becomes  necessary  to  subordinate  other  qualities 
to  this.  A  drawing  in  pure  outline  of  a  figure  may 
be  a  perfect  thing  in  itself.  The  moment  we  begin 
to  superadd  shading,  or  lines  expressive  of  relief 
of  any  kind,  we  introduce  another  element  ;  we  are 
aiming  at  another  kind  of  truth  or  beauty  ;  and  un- 
less we  have  also  a  distinctly  ideal  aim  in  this,  we 
shall  mar  the  simplicity  of  the  outline  without  gain- 


THE    INFLUENCE    OF    MATERIAL 

ing  any  compensating  advantage,  or  really  adding 

to  the  truth  or  beauty  of  the  drawing. 

In  designing,  too,  unless  we  can  so  contrive  the 
essential  characteristics  of  our  pattern  that  they 
shall  be  adaptable  to  the  method  and  material  of  its 
production,  and  make  its  reproduction  quite  prac- 
ticable, it  is  sure  to  reappear  more  or  less  marred 
and  incomplete.  The  thing  is  to  discover  what 
kind,  of  character  and  beauty  the  method  will  allow 
of— whether  beauty  or  quality  of  line,  or  surface, 
or  colour,  or  material ;  and  if  to  be  reproduced  in 
a  particular  method  or  material,  the  design  should 
be  thought  out  in  the  method  or  material  for  which 
it  is  destined,  rather  than  as  a  drawing  on  paper, 
and  worked  out  accordingly,  using  every  oppor- 
tunity to  secure  the  particular  kind  of  beauty  natur- 
ally belonging  to  such  work  in  its  completed  form. 

Thus  we  should  naturally  think  of  planes  of  sur- 
face in  modelled  work,  and  the  delicate  play  of 
light  and  shade,  getting  our  equivalent  for  colour 
in  the  design  and  contrast  of  varied  surfaces.  In 
stained  glass  we  should  think  of  a  pattern  in  lead 
lines  inclosing  one  of  translucent  colour,  each  being 
interdependent  and  united  to  form  a  harmonious 
whole.  In  textile  design  we  should  be  influenced 
by  the  thought  of  the  difference  of  use,  plan,  and 
purpose  of  the  finished  material ;  as  the  difference 
between  a  rich  vertical  pattern  in  silk,  velvet,  or 
tapestry,  to  be  broken  by  folds  as  in  curtains  or 
hangings,  and  a  rich  carpet  pattern,  to  be  spread 
upon  the  unbroken  level  surface  of  a  floor.  The 
idea  of  the  wall  and  floor  should  here  influence  us 
as  well  as  the  actual  technical  necessities  of  the 
loom.  It  would  be  part  of  the  artistic  purpose 

64 


BRUSH-WORK 

affecting  the  imagination  and  artistic  motive,  and 
working  with  the  strictly  technical  conditions. 

The  mind  must  project  itself,  and  see  with  the 
inner  eye  the  effect  of  the  design  as  it  would  ap- 
pear in  actual  use,  as  far  as  possible.  Invention, 
knowledge,  and  experience  will  do  the  rest. 

Keeping,  however,  to  strictly  pictorial  or  graphic 
conditions — to  the  art  of  the  point  and  the  surface 
—with  which,  as  designers  and  draughtsmen,  we 
are  more  immediately  concerned,  we  cannot  forget 
certain  technical  considerations  strictly  belonging 
to  the  varieties  of  point  and  of  surface,  and  their 
relations  one  to  another.  The  flexible  point  of  the 
brush,  for  instance,  dipped  in  ink,  or  colour,  has  its 
own  peculiar  capacity,  its  own  range  of  treatment, 
one  might  say,  its  own  forms. 

The  management  admits  of  immense  variation 
of  use  and  touch,  and  its  range  of  depicting  and 
ornamental  power  are  very  great :  from  the  sim- 
pler leaf  forms,  which  seem  to  be  almost  a  reflection 
or  shadow  of  the  moist  pointed  brush  itself,  to  the 
elaborate  graphic  drawing  in  line  or  light  and 
shade. 

In  forming  the  leaf  shape  one  begins  with  a  light 
pressure,  if  at  the  point,  and  proceeds  to  increase 
it  for  the  middle  and  broader  end.  On  the  same 
principle  of  regulation  of  pressure  any  brush  forms 
may  be  built  up.  It  is  essential  for  freedom  in  work- 
ing with  the  brush  not  to  starve  or  stint  it  in  moist- 
ure or  colour.  For  ornamental  forms  a  full  brush 
should  be  used  :  otherwise  they  are  apt  to  look 
dragged  and  meagre.  For  a  rich  and  flowing  line 
also  a  full  brush,  however  fine,  is  necessary.  It  is 
quite  possible,  however,  to  use  it  with  a  different 

65  F 


BRUSH-WORK 


I 

I//'"" 


BRUSH    FORMS. 


aim,  and  to  produce  a  sort  of  crumbling  line  when 
half  dry,  and  also  in  colour-work  for  what  is  called 
dragging,  by  which  tone,  texture,  or  quality  may 

66 


BRUSH-WORK 

be  given  to  parts  of  a  drawing.   One  should  never 
lose  sight,  in  using  the  brush  as  a  drawing  tool,  of 


\  - 


DIRECT    BRUSH 
EXPRESSION  OF 


its  distinctive  quality  and  character,  and  impart  it 
to  all  work  done  by  its  means. 


BRUSH-WORK 

The  direct  touch  with  the  full  brush — to  culti- 
vate this  is  of  enormous  advantage  to  all  artists, 
whatever  particular  line  of  art  they  may  follow, 
since  it  may  be  said  to  be  of  no  less  value  in  design 
than  it  is  in  painting  pure  and  simple.  We  can  all 
feel  the  charm  of  the  broad  brush  washes  and  em- 
phatic brush  touches  of  a  master  of  water-colour 
landscape  such  as  De  Wint.  This  is  mastery  of 
brush  and  colour  in  one  direction — tone  and  effect. 
A  Japanese  drawing  of  a  bird  or  a  fish  may  show 
it  equally  in  another — character  and  form.  A  bit 
of  Oriental  porcelain  or  Persian  tile  may  show  the 
same  dexterous  charm  and  full-brush  feeling  exer- 
cised in  a  strictly  decorative  direction. 

The  empire  of  the  brush,  if  we  think  of  it  in  all 
its  various  forms  and  directions,  is  very  large  ;  and 
it  commands,  in  skilled  hands,  both  iineandform, 
in  all  their  varieties,  and  leaves  its  impress  in  all 
the  departments  of  art,  from  the  humble  but  dex- 
terous craftsman  who  puts  the  line  of  gold  or  colour 
round  the  edges  of  our  cups  and  saucers,  to 
the  highly  skilled  and  specialized  painter  of  easel 
pictures — say  the  academician  who  writes  cheques 
with  his  paint-brush ! 

Then  we  have  the  ordinary  varieties  of  the  firm 
point:  charcoal,  pencil,  pen.  Charcoal,  being  half- 
way between  hard  and  soft — a  sort  of  halfway 
house  or  bridge  for  one  passing  from  the  flexible 
brush  to  the  firm  and  hard  points  of  pencil  and 
pen — is  first  favourite  with  painters  when  they 
take  to  drawing.  Its  softness  and  removability 
adapts  it  as  a  tool  for  preliminary  and  preparatory 
sketching  in  for  all  purposes,  and  both  for  designer 
and  painter  ;  but  it  lends  itself  to  both  line  and 

68 


JAPANESE    DRAWING    OF    A    BIRD.       FROM    "THE    HUNDRED 
BIRDS    OF    BARI." 


69 


CHARCOAL   AND   PENCIL 

tone  drawing,  or  to  a  mixture  of  both.  It  is  there- 
fore a  very  good  material  for  rapid  studies  (say 
from  the  life)  and  the  seizing  of  any  effect  of  light 
and  shade  rapidly,  since  the  masses  can  be  laid 
in  readily,  and  greater  richness  and  depth  can  be 
obtained  in  shorter  time,  perhaps,  than  by  any 
other  kind  of  pencil. 

Charcoal  is  also  very  serviceable  for  large  car- 
toon-work, since  it  is  capable  of  both  delicacy  and 
force,  and  bears  working  up  to  any  extent.  A 
slight  rubbing  of  the  finger  gives  half  tones  when 
wanted,  and  is  often  serviceable  in  giving  greater 
solidity  and  finish  to  the  work. 

Then  there  is  the  lead  pencil — the  point-of- 
all-work,  as  it  might  be  called — more  generally 
serviceable  than  any  other,  whether  for  rapid 
sketches  and  jottings  in  the  note-book,  or  careful 
and  detailed  drawings,  or  sketching  in  for  the 
smaller  kinds  of  design-work.  It  is  also,  of 
course,  used  for  drawings  which  are  afterwards 
"  inked  in."  I  do  not  think,  however,  that  pen- 
work  done  in  this  way  is  so  free  or  characteristic 
as  when  done  direct,  or  at  any  rate  quite  freely, 
upon  a  mere  scaffolding  of  preliminary  lines,  used 
only  to  make  the  plans  for  the  chief  masses  and 
forms. 

Pencil  drawing  is  capable  of  being  carried  to  a 
greater  pitch  of  delicacy  and  finish,  and  has  a 
silvery  quality  all  its  own.  It  has  not  the  force 
or  range  of  charcoal,  but  in  its  own  technical 
range  it  possesses  many  advantages.  Its  gray 
and  soft  line,  however  charming  in  itself,  does 
not  fit  it  for  work  where  sharpness  and  precision 
of  line  and  touch  are  required,  as  may  be  said  to 

70 


THE  PEN 

be  the  case  with  all  work  intended  to  be  repro- 
duced by  some  process  of  handicraft  or  manu- 
facture, except  some  sorts  of  photo-engraving  or 
lithography.  We  must  therefore  look  to  another 
implement  to  enable  us  to  obtain  these  qualities, 
namely,  the  brush,  the  use  and  qualities  of  which  I 
have  already  touched  upon. 

There  remains  yet  another  point  of  the  firm 
and  decisive  order,  the  pen,  which  enables  us  to 
get  firmness  and  sharpness  of  line  and  precise 
definition,  as  well  as  considerable  range  of  treat- 
ment and  freedom  of  touch. 

The  pen  seems  to  bear  much  the  same  relation 
to  the  brush  as  the  lead  pencil  does  to  charcoal — 
not  capable  of  such  full  and  rich  effects  or  such 
flowing  freedom  of  line,  but  yet  possessing  its  own 
beauty  and  characteristic  kinds  of  expression.  Its 
true  province  is  in  comparatively  small  scale  work, 
and  its  natural  association  is  with  its  sister-pen  of 
literature  in  the  domain  of  book-design  and  deco- 
j  ration,  and  black  and  white  drawing  for  the  press. 
Its  varieties  are  endless,  and  the  ingenuity  of 
manufacturers  continually  places  before  us  fresh 
choice  of  pen-points  to  work  with  ;  but  though 
one  occasionally  meets  with  a  good  steel  pen,  I 
have  found  it  too  often  fails  one  just  when  it  is 
sufficiently  worn  to  the  right  degree  of  flexibility. 
One  returns  to  the  quill,  which  can  be  cut  to  suit 
the  particular  requirements  of  one's  work.  For 
large  bold  drawing  the  reed-pen  has  advantages, 
and  a  pleasant  rich  quality  of  line. 

But  with  whatever  point  we  may  work,  the 
great  object  is  to  be  perfectly  at  ease  with  it  in 
drawing — to  thoroughly  master  its  use  and  capa- 


THE  PEN 

cities,  so  that  in  our  search  for  that  other  com- 
mand, of  line  and  form,  we  may  feel  that  we  have 
in  our  hands  a  tool  upon  which  we  can  rely,  a 
trusty  spear  to  bear  down  the  many  difficulties 
and  discouragements  that  beset,  like  threatening 
dragons,  the  path  of  the  art-student. 


72 


CHAPTER    IV 

Of  the  Choice  of  Form — Elementary  Forms— Space-filling 
—Grouping — Analogies  of  Form — Typical  Forms  of  Ornament 
— Ornamental  Units — Equivalents  in  Form — Quantities  in  De- 
sign— Contrast — Value  of  Variations  of  Similar  or  Allied  Forms 
— Use  of  the  Human  Figure  and  Animal  Forms  in  Ornamental 
Design. 

WE  were  considering  the  choice  and  use  of 
Line  in  the  last  chapter  :  its  expressive 
characters  and  various  methods.  We  now  come 
to  the  no  less  important  question  to  the  designer 
and  draughtsman — The  Choice  of  Form. 

If  Line  may  be  said  to  be  the  bone  and  sinew 
of  design,  Form  is  the  substance  and  the  flesh, 
and  both  are  obviously  essential  to  its  free  life  and 
development. 

The  cube  and  the  sphere  give  us  the  funda- 
mental elements,  or  primal  types  from  which  are 
derived  the  multifarious,  ever  varying,  and  com- 
plex forms,  the  products  of  the  forces  and  condi- 
tions of  nature,  or  the  necessitous  inventiveness 
of  art,  just  as  we  may  take  the  square  and  the 
circle  to  be  the  parents  of  linear  and  geometric 
design. 

The  cube  and  the  sphere,  the  ellipse,  the  cone, 
and  the  pyramid,  with  other  comparatively  simple 
forms  of  solid  geometry,  present  themselves  to 

73 


ELEMENTARY    FORMS 

the  student  as  elementary  tests  of  draughtsman- 
ship— of  the  power,  that  is,  of  representing  solid 


ELEMENTARY  FORMS:   PYRAMID,  SPHERE,  CUBE,  HEXAGON,  CONE. 

bodies  upon  a  plane  surface.  Such  forms  being 
more  simple  and  regular  than  any  natural  forms, 
they  are  supposed  to  reduce  the  problem  of  draw- 


USE   OF    ELEMENTARY    FORMS    IN    ARCHITECTURE. 

ing  to  its  simplest  conditions.  They  certainly 
afford  very  close  tests  of  correctness  of  eye, 
making  any  fault  in  perspective  or  projection  at 
once  apparent. 

74 


POPPYHEADS. 

75 


ELEMENTARY   FORMS 

To  avoid,  however,  falling  into  mechanical  ways, 
and  to  maintain  the  interest  and  give  vitality  to 
such  studies,  the  relation  of  such  forms  to  forms 
in  nature  and  art  should  be  borne  in  mind,  and  no 
opportunity  missed  of  comparing  them,  or  of 
seeking  out  their  counterparts,  corresponding 
principles,  and  variations,  as  well  as  their  practical 
bearing,  both  functional  and  constructive  ;  as  in 
the  case  of  the  typical  forms  of  flowers,  buds,  and 
seed-vessels,  for  instance,  where  the  cone  and 
the  funnel,  and  the  spherical,  cylindrical,  and 
tubular  principles  are  constantly  met  with,  as 
essential  parts  of  the  characters  and  organic 
necessities  of  the  plant :  the  cone  and  the  funnel 
mostly  in  buds  and  flower-petals  for  protection 
and  inclosure  of  the  pollen  and  seed  germs,  the 
tube  for  conducting  the  juices  ;  the  spherical  form 
to  resist  moisture  externally,  or  to  hold  it  in- 
ternally, or  to  avoid  friction,  and  facilitate  close 
storage,  as  in  the  case  of  seeds  in  pods.  The 
seed-vessel  of  the  poppy,  for  instance,  has  a 
curious  little  pent-house  roof  to  shield  the  inter- 
stices (like  windows  in  a  tower)  till  the  seed  is 
ripe  and  the  time  comes  for  it  to  be  shaken  out 
of  the  shell  or  pod.  A  further  practical  reason 
for  the  prevalence  of  spherical  form  in  seeds  is 
that  they  may,  when  the  outer  covering  or  husk 
perishes,  more  readily  roll  out  and  fall  into  the 
interstices  of  the  ground  ;  or  when,  as  in  the  case 
of  various  fruits,  such  as  the  apple  and  orange, 
the  envelope  itself  is  spherical  and  intended  to 
carry  their  flat  or  pointed  seeds  to  the  ground, 
where  it  falls  and  rolls  when  ripe. 

The  cube  and  the  various  multiple  forms  may 


ELEMENTARY   FORMS 

be  found  in  crystals  and  basaltic  rocks,  as  well  as 
in  organic  nature,  as,  for  instance,  in  the  honey- 
comb of  bees,  where  choice  of  form  is  a  construc- 
tive necessity  :  the  cube  is  in  every  sense  of  the 
word  the  corner-stone  in  architecture,  and  with- 
out squaring  and  plumbing  no  building  could  be 
constructed,  while  the  cylindrical  and  conical  prin- 


APPLE   CUT   TO   SHOW    POSITION   OF   SEEDS. 

ciples  of  form  are  illustrated  in  towers  and  roofs, 
spires  and  pinnacles.  In  architectural  ornament 
and  carved  decoration  the  cube  and  sphere  again 
form  the  basis,  both  forming  ornaments  them- 
selves by  mere  recurrence  and  repetition,  and 
also  forming  constructional  bases  of  ornament. 
A  very  simple  but  effective  form  of  carved 

77 


DOG-TOOTH    ORNAMENT 

ornament  characteristic  of  early  Gothic  work  is 

what  is  known  as  the  dog-tooth.     This  is  formed 


CUIJE  AND  SPHERE  IN  ARCHITECTURAL  ORNAMENT  :  BRICK 
DENTAL,  BALL  FLOWER  MOULDING,  AND  DOG-TOOTH 
MOULDING. 

simply  by  cutting  a  cube  of  stone 
into   a    pyramid,    depressing    the 
sides,  and  cutting  them  into  geo- 
metric  leaves,  leaving  the   sharp 
angles  of  the   pyramid  from   the 
base    to    the    apex    standing   out 
in  bold    relief.      In    ground-plan DOG.TOOTH  FORMED 
this  is  simply  composed  geometri- 
cally of  a  rectangle  divided  diago- 
nally into  four   equal  parts,  and  by  striking  four 
semicircles  from  the  centres  of  the  four  sides  of 
the  rectangle.     Here  we  get  a  form  of  ornament 

78 


FROM   CUBE. 


FILLING   OF   SPACES 

in  the  flat  which  appears  to  have  been  very  widely 
used,  and  reappears  in  the  early  art  of  nearly  all 
races  so  far  as  I  am  aware.  We  find  it,  for 
instance,  in  Assyrian  carving  and  in  early  Greek 
decoration,  in  China  and  Japan,  and  in  European 
mediaeval  work  of  all  kinds.  Its  charm  perhaps 
lies  in  its  simplicity  of  construction  yet  rich  orna- 
mental effect,  either  as  carved  work  or  as  a  flat 
painted  diaper.  It  might  also  be  used  as  the  geo- 
metric basis  of  an  elaborate  repeating  wall-pattern 
over  a  large  surface. 

When  it  comes  to  the  choice  of  form,  when  we 
are  face  to  face  with  a  particular  problem  in  design, 
ornament,  or  decoration  (say,  as  most  frequently 
happens,  it  is  to  fill  a  panel  of  a  given  shape  and 
size),  we  are  bound  to  consider  form  in  relation 
to  that  particular  panel,  to  the  subject  we  pro- 
pose to  treat,  and  the  method  by  which  the  de- 
sign is  to  be  produced,  or  the  object  and  position 
for  which  it  is  intended.  This  generally  narrows 
the  range  of  possible  choice.  Firstly,  there  is  the 
shape  of  the  panel  itself.  A  well-known  exercise 
for  the  Teacher's  Certificate  under  the  Depart- 
ment of  Science  and  Art  is  to  give  a  drawing  of 
a  plant  adapted  to  design  in  a  square  and  a  circle. 
Now  in  the  abstract  one  would  be  inclined  to 
select  for  a  circular  fitting  different  forms  from 
those  one  might  select  for  a  square  filling,  since  I 
always  consider  that  the  shape  of  the  space  must 
influence  the  character  of  the  filling  in  line  and 
form.  Still,  if  the  problem  is  to  fill  a  square  and 
a  circle  by  the  same  forms,  or  an  adaptation  of 
them,  we  must  rely  more  and  more  upon  differ- 
ence of  treatment  of  these  forms,  and  not  try  to 

79 


FILLING   OF   SPACES 

squeeze  round  forms  into  rectangular  space,  or 
rectangular  forms  into  circular  space.  In  a  rose, 
for  instance,  it  would  be  possible  to  dwell  on  its 
angular  side  for  the  square,  and  on  its  curvilinear 
side  for  the  circle.  Anyway,  we  should  seek  in 
the  first  place  a  good  and  appropriate  motive. 


FILLING    OF    SQUARE    SPACE. 

Supposing  the  design  is  forwood  inlay,  we  should 
have  to  select  forms  that  would  not  cause  unneces- 
sary difficulty  in  cutting,  since  every  form  in  the 
design  would  have  to  be  cut  out  in  thin  wood  and 
inserted  in  the  corresponding  hollow  cut  in  the 
panel  or  plank  to  receive  it.  Complex  or  compli- 
cated forms  would  therefore  be  ruled  out,  as  being 

80 


INLAY   DESIGN 

not  only  difficult  or  impossible  to  reproduce  in  the 
material,  but  ineffective. 

A  true  feeling  for  the  particular  effect  and  de- 
corative charm  of  inlaid  work  should  lead  us  to 
limit  ourselves  to  comparatively  few  and  simple 
forms,  treating  those  forms  in  an  emphatic  but  ab- 


FILLING    OF  CIRCULAR    SPACE. 


stract  way,  and  making  use  of  recurring  line  and 
form  as  far  as  possible.  We  might  make  an  effective 
panel,  say,  for  a  casket,  or  a  clock-case,  or  a  floor,  by 
strictly  limiting  ourselves  to  very  few  and  simple 
forms — say,  for  instance,  a  stem,  a  leaf,  a  berry,  or 
disc,  and  a  bird  form,  or  fruit  and  leaf  forms.  It 
would  be  possible  to  build  up  a  design  with  such  ele- 
ments both  pleasant  in  effect  and  well  adapted  to  the 

8f~t 
I  -  G 


INLAY   DESIGN 

work.   An  excellent  plan  would  be  tocutout  all  one's 

forms  with  knife  or  scissors  in  stiff  paper,  as  a  test 


i .   UNITS   or 

SIMPLE    INLAY 

PATTERN 


2..  MOTIVE.  FOR 
INLAID  PATTERN 
BUILT  OF  THE 
SAME 


3 .     TR£/\TA\£NT 

OF  FORM  AS 

PATTERN   UNfTf 
FOR.  INLAID  WORK 

A 

PATTERN  MOTIVE 

FOR.  INLAID  WOR-VC. 


of  the  practicability  of  an  inlay  design.  This  is 
actually  done  with  the  working  drawing  by  the  in- 
lay cutter. 

82 


INLAY   DESIGN 

I  once  designed  an  inlaid  floor  for  the  centre  of 
a  picture  gallery.  The  scale  was  rather  large,  and 
the  work  was  bold.  One  kept  to  large,  bold,  and 
simple  forms — water-lilies  and  broad  leaves,  swans 
scallop  shells,  and  zigzag  borders.  Forms  which 
can  be  readily  produced  by  the  brush  would  gene- 
rally answer  well  for  inlay,  since  they  would  have 
simpleand  sweeping  boundaries  and  flat  silhouette. 
And  for  inlay  one  is  practically  designing  in  black, 
white, or  tinted  silhouette.  This  makes  it  verygood 
practice  for  all  designers,  both  for  the  invention  it 
tends  to  call  out,  owing  to  the  limited  resources  and 
restriction  as  to  forms,  and  also  as  giving  facility 
and  readiness  in  blocking  in  the  masses  of  pattern. 
The  water-colour  painter,  too,  would  find  that 
blocking  in  in  flat  local  colour  all  his  forms  and  the 
colours  of  his  background  was  an  excellent  method 
of  preparatory  work,  and  afforded  good  practice  in 
direct  painting,  since  he  could  add  his  secondary 
shades  and  tints  in  the  same  manner  until  the  work 
was  brought  to  completion,  while  preserving  that 
fresh  effect  of  the  undisturbed  washes  which  is  the 
great  charm  of  water-colour. 

In  seeking  forms  to  group  together  harmoniously 
— which  is  the  whole  object  of  composition — we 
shall  find  that  much  the  same  kind  of  principle 
holds  good  whether  we  are  arranging  a  still-life 
group  or  designing  a  wall-paper  or  textile.  It  is 
only  a  difference  of  degree  and  scale.  In  the  one 
case  we  are  designing  in  the  solid  with  the  actual 
objects,  before  drawing  or  painting  them  as  a  har- 
monious pictorial  composition  ;  in  the  other  we  are 
arranging  forms  upon  the  flat  with  a  view  to  har- 
monious composition  with  a  strictly  decorative  pur- 

83 


GROUPING   OF  ALLIED   FORMS 
pose  in  view.     In  the  first  we  are  dealing  with 
concrete  form  in  the  round  ;  in  the  second,  gene- 
rally speaking,  with  abstract  form  in  the  flat. 

But  in  either  case  we  want  harmony.  We  can- 
not, therefore,  throw  together  a  number  of  forms 
unrelated  to  each  in  line,  contour,  or  meaning.  We 
seek  in  composing  or  designing  not  contradictions, 


GROUPING    OF    ALLIED    FORMS  :    COMPOSITION    OF    CURVES. 

but  correspondences  of  form,  with  just  an  element 
of  contrast  to  give  flavour  and  point.  In  grouping 
pottery,  for  instance,  we  should  not  place  big  and 
little  or  squat  and  slender  forms  close  together 
without  connecting  links  of  some  kind.  We  want 
a  series  of  good  lines  that  help  one  another  and 
lead  up  to  one  another  in  a  kind  of  friendly  co- 
operation. Broad  smooth  forms  and  rounded  sur- 
faces, again,  require  relief  and  a  certain  amount  of 


GROUPING  OF  ALLIED  FORMS 
contrast.  We  feel  the  needof  crisp  leaves  or  flowers, 
perhaps,  with  our  pottery  form.  We  may  safely 
go  far,  however,  on  the  principle  of  grouping  simi- 
lar or  allied  forms,  giving  our  composition  as  a 
whole  either  a  curvilinear  or  angular  character  in 


GROUPING    OF    ALLIED    FORMS  :    COMPOSITION    OF    ANGLES. 

its  general  lines,  masses,  and  forms,  on  the  prin- 
ciple ot  like  to  like.  This  will  entirely  depend 
upon  our  choice  of  grouping  of  form  ;  but  the  more 
by  our  selection  we  make  our  composition  tend 
distinctly  in  the  one  direction  or  the  other,  the 
more  character  it  will  be  likely  to  possess. 

In  selecting   forms  for  still-life   grouping  and 

85 


GROUPING 

painting,  I  think  increased  interest  might  be  gained 

by  arranging  significant  objects,  accessories  bear- 


STILL-LIFE    GROUP    ILLUSTRATIVE   OF    WOOD-ENGRAVING. 

ing  upon  particular  pursuits,  for  instance,  in  natural 
relationship  and  surrounding.  Groups  suggesting 
certain  handicrafts,  for  instance,  such  as  the  clear 
glass  globe  of  the  wood-engraver,  the  sand-bag, 

86 


GROUPING 

the  block  upon  it,  the  tools,  gravers  lying  around, 
the  eye-glass,  an  old  book  of  woodcuts,  and  so  forth. 
Other  groups  suggestive  of  various  arts  and  indus- 
tries could  be  arranged — such  motives  as  metal- 
work,  pottery,  literature,  painting,  music,  embroi- 
dery, spring,  summer,  autumn,  and  winter,  might 
all  be  suggestively  illustrated  by  well-selected 


JAPANESE   DIAGONAL   PATTERN. 

groups  of  still  life.  Even  different  historic  periods 
might  be  emblematically  suggested — I  should  like 
to  see  more  done  in  this  way. 

To  return  to  design  in  the  flat.  If  we  start  with 
a  motive  of  circular  masses,  we  cannot  suddenly 
associate  them  with  sharp  angles — I  mean  in  our 
leading  forms.  Of  course  we  can  make  a  network 
or  trellis  or  diaper  of  the  angles,  to  form  a  mat, 

87 


TREATMENT    OF    FRUIT    AND    LEAF    FORMS  :    CORRESPONDING 
CURVATURE. 


CORRESPONDING   FORMS 

ground, or  a  framework  on  which  to  place  our  broad 
masses,  as  we  may  see  effectively  done  by  the 
Chinese  and  Japanese. 

If  the  principal  group  of  forms  in  our  pattern, 
say,  are  fruit  forms — apples,  pomegranates,  or 
oranges — we  must  re-echo  or  carry  out  the  curves 
in  a  lesser  degree  in  the  connecting  stems  and 
leaves.  Change  the  form  of  the  fruit,  say,  to  lemons, 
and  a  further  variation  of  connecting  or  subsidiary 
curve  in  stems  and  leaves  will  naturally  suggest 
itself,  and  at  the  same  time  in  following  such  prin- 
ciples we  shall  be  expressing  in  an  abstract  way 
more  of  the  character  of  the  tree  or  plant  itself.  In 
looking  at  the  leaf  of  a  tree  one  may  often  see  a 
suggestion  of  the  general  character  and  contour  of 
the  tree  itself,  and  we  know  the  line  : 

"Just  as  the  twig  is  bent  the  tree's  inclined." 

In  dealing  with  angular  motives  the  same  prin- 
ciple would  be  followed,  but  corresponding  to  the 
difference  of  motive.  Let  the  form  of^your  detail 
be  reflected  in  the  character_ofj/mir  mass. 
"I  Have  spoken  of  the  necessity  in  designing  of 
seeking  correspondences  in  form,  and  although, 
could  we  place  every  form  in  proper  sequence  and 
supply  all  the  intermediary  links  to  unite  them 
harmoniously,  forms  of  extreme  diversity  might 
thus  be  associated,  given  great  extension  of  space 
(as  in  wall  decoration,  for  instance),  even  then  we 
should  want  these  forms  to  correspond  and  recur. 
Yet,  as  a  rule,  having  to  deal  in  design  with  what 
are  really  parts  rather  than  wholes,  we  can  only 
endeavour  by  making  the  design  of  these  parts  sim- 
ple and  harmonious  in  line  and  form,  and  true  to 


CORRESPONDENCE  IN  GENERAL  CONTOUR  BETWEEN  LEAF 

AND  TREE. 

90 


SOME    ANALOGIES    IN    FORM. 
91 


ANALOGIES   OF   FORM 

their  special  conditions,  to  render  their  association 

decoratively  possible. 

Certain  forms  seem  to  lend  themselves  to  design 
in  ornament  better  than  others,  because  they  give 
the  designer  certain  lines  and  masses  which  can  be 
harmoniously  repeated  or  combined  with  other  al- 
lied forms  or  lines.  Design  from  this  point  of  view 
becomes  a  search  for  analogies  of  form. 

I  mentioned  certain  simple  geometric  forms  com- 
mon to  nature  and  art.  Early  ornament  consists 
in  the  repetition  of  such  forms.  The  next  step  was 
to  connect  them  by  lines  :  and  so  form  and  line, 
through  endless  vicissitudes  and  complexities,  be- 
came united,  to  live  happily  in  the  world  of  decor- 
ative motive  ever  after.  But  long  after  the  primitive 
unadorned  geometric  forms  themselves  have  ceased 
to  be  the  chief  forms  in  ornament,  their  controlling 
influence  is  asserted  over  the  boundaries  of  the 
more  complicated  masses  introduced. 

The  simple  rectangle  is  disguised  under  the  fret, 
the  circle  and  spiral  assert  their  swa-y  over  the 
boundaries  of  the  palmette,  or  circle  and  semicircle 
unite  to  form  the  oval  so  frequently  used  both  as  a 
unit  in  Greek  ornament  and  as  a  controlling  bound- 
ary. These  are  typical  border  forms  :  for  extension 
and  repetition  in  fields  of  pattern  we  find  the  same 
oeometric  plans  at  work  in  combination  and  sub- 
division, forming  at  first  the  ornament  itself,  and 
afterwards  furnishing  the  plan  and  controlling 
boundaries  only.  Even  in  later  stages  in  the  evo- 
lution of  surface  decoration,  in  what  are  called 
naturalistic  floral  patterns,  amid  apparent  careless- 
ness and  freedom,  by  the  exigencies  of  repetition 
the  ghost  of  buried  geometric  connection  reappears, 

92 


o  o  o 


RYTMM  r^y  CONNECPNC,  t-li^E 


ODD 


5QUARE 
THE  PARENT 
PATTERN  & 


SIMPLE.  REPETITION 

CIRCLE 
FORMS    OF 


TREE   OF    TYPICAL    PATTERN    FORMS,  UNITS,  AND    SYSTEMS. 

93 


TYPICAL   FORMS   OF   ORNAMENT 
and  compels  the  most  naturalistic  roses  on  a  wall- 
paper to  acknowledge  themselves  artificial  after  all, 
as  they  nod  to  their  counterparts  from  the  masked 
angles  of  the  inevitable  diaper  repeat. 

We  find  in  the  historical  forms  of  decorative  art 
constantly  recurring  types  of  form  and  line,  such 
as  the  lotus  of  the  Egyptians,  the  anthemia  of  the 
Greeks,  the  pineapple-like  flower  and  palmette  of 
the  Persians,  the  peony  of  the  Chinese.  These 
forms,  at  first  valued  solely  for  their  symbolical  and 
heraldic  significance,  and  continually  demanded, 
became  to  the  designer  important  elements  or  units 
in  ornament.  They  gave  him  fine  sweeping  curves, 
radiating  lines,  and  bold  masses,  without  which  a 
designer  cannot  live,  any  more  than  a  poet  without 
words.  They  were  capable,  too,  of  infinite  varia- 
tion in  treatment,  a  variation  which  has  been  con- 
tinued ever  since,  as  by  importation  to  different 
countries  (the  movement  going  on  from  east  to 
west)  the  same  forms  were  treated  by  designers  of 
different  races,  and  became  mixed  with  other  native 
elements,  or  consciously  imitated  as  they  are  now 
by  Manchester  designers  and  manufacturers,  to  be 
sold  again  in  textile  form  to  their  original  owners, 
as  it  were,  in  the  far  East.  Truly,  a  strange  turn 
of  the  wheel. 

The  range  of  choice  in  ornamental  units  is,  in- 
deed, embarrassingly  large  for  themodern  designer, 
and  a  careful  and  tasteful  selection  becomes  of  more 
and  more  importance.  It  is  not  the  number  of 
forms  you  can  combine,  or  because  they  are  of  Per- 
sian or  Chinese  origin,  that  your  work  will  be  ar- 
tistic, but  the  judicious  and  inventive  use  made  of 
the  elements  of  your  design.  Ready-made  units, 

94 


ORNAMENTAL  UNITS 

such  as  the  Oriental  forms  I  have  mentioned,  are 
no  doubt  easier  to  combine,  to  make  an  effect  with, 
because  a  certain  amount  of  selection  has  already 
been  done.  In  fact,  with  such  forms  as  the  Persian 
or  Indian  palmette,  we  are  dealing  with  the  results 
of  centuries  of  ornamental  evolution,  and  with  em- 
blems immemorially  treasured  by  ancient  races.  It 
behoves  us,  if  we  are  called  upon  to  recombine 
them,  to  treat  them  with  sympathy,  refinement,  and 
respect,  and  to  let  them  deteriorate  as  little  as  pos- 
sible, for  the  spirit  of  an  important  ornamental  form 
\is  like  a  gathered  flower — it  soon  withers  and  be- 
comes limp. 

It  is  the  spirit,  after  all,  that  is  the  important 
thing  to  preserve,  in  decorative  design,  however 
widely  we  may  depart  from  the  letter  sometimes. 
This  is  a  difficult  quality  to  define,  but  I  should  say 
it  chiefly  consists  in  a  nice  attention  to  the  charac- 
ter of  form,  the  elastic  spring  of  curves,  an  under- 
standing of  the  construction  and  proportions,  and 
grasp  of  the  effect  In  designing  we  constantly  feel 
the  need  of  repeating  certain  masses  with  variations 
or  balancing  them  by  equivalents,  or  the  necessity 
of  leading  up  to  certain  main  forms  by  subsidiary 
forms,  and  to  carry  out  their  lines  in  other  parts  of 
the  composition.  In  designing  figures  or  emblems, 
for  instance,  within  inclosed  spaces,  such  as  shields 
or  cartouche  shapes,  forming  leading  elements  in  a 
design,  it  requires  much  invention  and  ornamental 
feeling  so  to  arrange  them  that,  while  different 
in  subject  or  meaning,  and  differently  spaced, 
they  shall  yet  properly  counterbalance  each  other, 
and,  though  varied  in  detail,  shall  yet  be  equiva- 
lent in  quantity.  The  same  sort  of  feeling  would 

95 


EQUIVALENTS   IN   FORM 

govern  the  case  of  designing  two  masses  of  fruit 
and  foliage,  say,  forming  two  halves  of  an  oblong 
panel,  which,  though  starting  on  the  symmetric 
plan  from  the  centre,  are  not  intended  to  be  alike 


SKETCHES  TO   SHOW  USE    OF   COUNTERBALANCE,  QUANTITY,  AND 
EQUIVALENTS    IN    DESIGNING. 

in  detail  ;  or  in  a  frieze  composed  of  a  series  of 
formalized  trees,  where  it  was  desired  to  have  each 
different,  say,  to  express  the  progression  of  the 
seasons,  it  would  be  the  sense  of  the  necessity  of 

96 


QUANTITIES    AND    COUNTERCHANGE   OF    BORDER   AND    FIELD    IN 
CARPET    MOTIVES. 


97 


II 


QUANTITIES    IN    DESIGN 

equivalents  which   would  govern  the  decorative 

effect. 

Such  considerations  naturally  lead  us  to  the 
question  of  the  use  of  quantities  in  design — the 
ornamental  proportions  of  ornament,  or  the  con- 


SKETCH    TO    ILLUSTRATE   VALUE    OF    DIFFERENT    QUANTITIES 
IN    PERSIAN    RUGS. 

trasting  distribution  of  form  and  line.  For  the 
mere  repetition  of  ornamental  forms  over  surfaces 
and  objects  without  reference  to  proportion  or 
structure  is  not  decoration.  The  perception  of  ap- 
propriate quantities  in  design  is  really  the  decor- 
ative gauge  or  measure  of  effect. 

In  designing  a  bordered  panel — or  say  a  carpet 


QUANTITIES   IN    DESIGN 

—we  might  decide  to  throw  the  weight  of  pattern, 
colour,  or  emphasis  upon  either  the  field  or  border. 
Supposing  the  field  had  a  dark  ground  upon  which 
the  arabesque  or  floral  design  was  relieved,  in  the 


SKEICII    TO    ILLUSTRATE    VALUE    OF    DIFFERENT    QUANTITIES 
IN    PERSIAN    RUGS. 

border  it  would  be  most  effective  to  transpose  this 
arrangement,  making  the  ground  light,  and  bring- 
ing out  the  border  design  dark  upon  it.  Or,  if  the 
motive  were  reversed,  giving  a  light  ground  to  the 

99 


QUANTITIES   IN   DESIGN 

centre,  with  the  pattern  dark,  the  border  might  be 
brought  out  on  a  dark  field.  Or,  again,  for  a  less 
emphatic  treatment  the  quantities  of  the  pattern 
itself  might  be  almost  infinitely  varied,  massive 
forms  and  close  fillings  contrasting  with  open  bor- 
ders and  united  with  intermediary  bands. 


SKETCH  TO    ILLUSTRATE    VALUE    OF    DIFFERENT    QUANTITIES 
IN    PERSIAN    RUGS. 

These  intermediary  bands  or  subsidiary  borders 
are  very  important  in  Eastern  rugs  and  carpets, 
and  their  quantities  very  carefully  considered.  A 
Persian  designer,  for  instance,  would  never  leave  a 
blank  unbroken  strip  of  colour  to  surround  his  field; 
his  object  is  not  to  isolate  the  quantities  of  his  pat- 
tern, but  to  distinguish  and  unite  them :  so  he  makes 
use  of  the  subsidiary  borders  as  additional  quanti- 

100 


CONTRAST 

ties.  A  usual  arrangement  which  always  looks 
well  is  to  have  the  border  proper  inclosed  in  two 
,  •  bands  of  about  the  same  width  and  quantity  in  pat- 
tern— or  they  might  be  a  repeat  of  each  other— 
and  to  inclose  the  field  or  centre  within  another 
narrow  subsidiary  border.  But  the  variations  to  be 
observed  in  any  chance  selection  of  Persian  rugs 
or  carpets  are  constant,  and  the  amount  of  subtle 
variety  and  invention  in  these  subsidiary  borders 
is  endless. 

Very  excellent  examples  of  the  treatment  and 
distribution  of  quantities  may  also  be  studied  in  the 
older  Indian  printed  cottons,  such  as  maybe  seen 
at  South  Kensington. 

The  consideration  of  quantities  in  form  and  de- 
sign involves  the  question  of  contract)  which,  in- 
deed, can  hardly  be  separated  from  it.  There  is 
the  contrast  of  form  and  line,  and  the  contrast  of 
colour  and  plane.  It  is  with  the  first  kind  we  are 
dealing  now. 

Take  the  simplest  linear  border,  such  as  the  type 
common  in  Greek  work.  We  should  easily  weary 
of  the  continual  repetition  of  such  a  form  alone 
and  unassisted,  but  add  a  vertical  with  an  alterna- 
tive dark  filling,  and  we  get  a  certain  richness  and 
solidity  which  is  a  relief  at  once.  Add  another 
quantity,  and  we  get  the  rich  effect  of  the  egg  and 
tongue  or  egg  and  dart  moulding. 

A  still  simpler  instance  of  the  use  of  contrast, 
however,  is  the  chequer,  or  the  principle  of  equal 
alternation  of  dark  and  light  masses  ;  but  this 
touches  colour  contrast  rather  than  form. 

The  love  of  contrast  makes  the  Chinese  porce- 
lain-painter break  the  blue  borders  of  his  plates 

101 


uuuuu 
uiuiu 


RECURRENCE    AND    CONTRAST    IN    BORDER   MOTIVES. 


102 


VARIATION  OF  ALLIED  FORMS 
with  small  cartouche-like  forms  inclosing  the  light 
ground,  varied  with  a  spray  or  device  of  some  light 
kind  ;  or  the  diagonal,  closely-filled  field  of  his 
woven  silk  by  broad  discs  or  cartouches  of  another 
plane  of  ornament.  But  the  love  of  sharp  or  very 
violent  contrasts,  more  especially  of  form,  may 
easily  lead  one  astray  and  be  destructive  of  orna- 
mental effect.  Like  all  decorative  considerations, 
the  artistic  use  of  contrast  depends  much  upon  the 
particular  case  and  the  conditions  of  the  work,  and 
one  cannot  lay  down  any  unvarying  rules.  There 
are  agreeable  and  disagreeable  contrasts,  and  their 
choice  and  use  must  depend  upon  the  individual 
artist. 

The  most  beautiful  kinds  of  design  rather  seem 
to  depend  upon  the  harmonious  variation  in  asso- 
ciation of  similar  or  allied  forms  than  on  sharp 
contrasts. 

In  compositions  of  figures  the  association  of  the 
delicate  curves  and  angles  of  the  human  form,  and 
the  lines  of  drapery,  with  the  emphatic  verticals 
and  horizontals,  the  semicircles  and  rectangles  of 
architectural  form,  for  instance,  are  always  delight- 
ful in  competent  hands  ;  as  also  compositions  of 
figure  and  landscape,  with  its  possibilities  of  undu- 
lating line  corrected  by  the  severe  horizon,  or  sea- 
line,  and  contrasted  with  the  vertical  lines  of  trees, 
stems,  and  the  rich  forms  of  foliage  masses. 

For  the  same  reasons  both  of  correspondence 
and  contrast,  masses  of  type  or  lettering  of  good 
form  are  admirable  as  foils  to  figure  designs,  in 
which  commemorative  monuments  of  all  kinds  and 
book  designs  afford  abundant  opportunities  to  the 
designer. 

103 


USE   OF   INCLOSING    BOUNDARIES    IN   DESIGNING  ANIMAL  FORMS 

IN   DECORATIVE   PATTERN. 

104 


DECORATIVE    SPACING    OF    FIGURES    WITHIN    GEOMETRIC 
BOUNDARIES. 

105 


USE  OF  HUMAN  FIGURE  AND  ANIMAL  FORMS 

In  surface  or  textile  decoration  of  all  kinds 
nothing  gives  so  much  relief  and  vitality  as  the 
judicious  use  of  animal  forms  and  the  human  figure, 
although  they  are  not  much  favoured  at  present. 
The  forms  of  birds  and  animals,  if  designed  in  re- 
lation to  the  rest  of  the  pattern,  will  give  a  pleas- 
ant variety  of  form  and  line,  and  in  their  forms  and 
lines  we  find  just  those  elements  both  of  corre- 
spondence and  contrast,  in  their  relation  to  geo- 
metric or  to  floral  design,  which  are  so  valuable. 

In  order. to  combine  such  forms  successfully, 
however,  great  care  in  designing  is  necessary;  and 
a  good  sound  principle  to  follow  as  a  general  guide 
is  to  make  the  boundaries  of  the  bird  or  animal 
touch  the  limits  of  an  imaginary  inclosing  form 
of  some  simple  geometric  or  floral  or  leaf  shape 
(see  p.  104).  This  would  at  once  control  the  form 
and  render  it  available  in  a  pattern  as  a  decorative 
mass  or  unit.  The  particular  shape  of  the  con- 
trolling form  must,  of  course,  depend  upon  the 
general  character  of  the  design,  whether  free  and 
flowing  or  square  and  restricted,  the  nature  of  the 
repeat,  the  ultimate  position  of  the  work,  and  so  on. 
A  study  of  Gothicheraldryand  the  earlySicilian  silk 
patterns  would  be  very  instructive  in  this  connec- 
tion, since  it  is  rather  the  heraldic  ideal  than  that 
of  the  natural  history  book  which  is  decoratively 
appropriate.  At  the  same  time  it  is  quite  possible 
to  combine  ornamental  treatment  with  a  great  deal 
of  natural  truth  in  structure  and  character. 

Much  the  same  principles  apply  to  the  treatment 
of  the  human  figure  as  an  element  in  ornament ; 
they  should  be  designed,  whether  singly  or  in 
groups,  under  the  control  of  imaginary  bound- 

106 


USE  OF  HUMAN  FIGURE  AND  ANIMAL  FORMS 
aries,  and  care  must  be  taken  that  in  line  and  mass 
they  re-echo  (or  are  re-echoed  by)  other  lines  which 
connect  them  with  the  rest  of  the  design,  if  they 
occur  as  incidents  in  repeating  wall-paper  or  hang- 
ing design,  for  instance.  It  is,  however,  quite  pos- 
sible to  imagine  a  decorative  effect  produced  by 
the  use  of  figures  alone  (see  p.  105),  with  some- 
thing very  subsidiary  in  the  way  of  connecting 
links  of  linear  or  floral  pattern,  much  as  figures 
were  used  by  the  ancient  Greek  vase-painters, 
beautifully  distributed  as  ornament  over  the  con- 
cave or  convex  surfaces  of  the  vases  and  vessels 
of  the  potter,  the  forms  of  which,  as  all  good  de- 
coration should  do,  they  helped  to  express  as  well 
as  to  adorn 


107 


CHAPTER   V 

Of  the  Influence  of  Controlling  Lines,  Boundaries,  Spaces, 
and  Plans  in  Designing — Origin  of  Geometric  Decorative 
Spaces  and  Panels  in  Architecture — Value  of  Recurring  Line 
—Tradition — Extension — Adaptability — Geometric  Structural 
Plans— Frieze  and  Field — Ceiling  Decoration — Co-operative 
Relation. 

THE  function  of  line  considered  from  the  point 
of  view  of  its   controlling    influence    as   a 
boundary,  or  inclosure,  of  design,  upon  which   I 
touched  in  the  last  chapter,  is  a  very  important 
one,  and  deserves  most  attentive  study. 

The  usual  problem  a  designer  in  the  flat  has  to 
solve  is  to  fill  harmoniously  a  given  space  or  panel 
defined  by  a  line  —some  simple  geometric  form- 
such  as  a  square  or  a  circle,  a  parallelogram,  a  dia- 
mond, a  lunette. 

Now  it  is  possible  to  regard  such  spaces  or 
panels  as  more  or  less  unrelated,  and  simply  as  the 
boundaries  of  an  individual  composition  or  picture 
of somekind.  Yetevensoconsideredacertain  sense 
of  geometric  control  would  come  in  in  the  selection 
of  our  lines  and  masses,  both  in  regard  to  each  other 
and  in  regard  to  the  shape  of  the  inclosing  bound- 
ary. We  seem  to  feel  the  need  of  some  answer- 
ing line  or  re-echo  in  the  character  of  the  compo- 
sition to  the  shape  of  its  boundary,  to  give  it  its 

1 08 


RELATION  OF  DESIGN    TO    BOUNDARY  :    SIMPLE    LINEAR  MOTIVES 
AND    PATTERN    BASES. 


INFLUENCE  OF  CONTROLLING  LINES,  ETC. 
distinctive  reason  for  existence  in  that  particular 
form — just  as  we  should  expect  a  shell-fish  to  con- 
form to  the  shape  of  its  shell.  Such  a  re-echo  or 
acknowledgment  might  be  ever  so  slight,  or  might 
be  quite  emphatic  and  dominate  as  the  leading 
motive,  but  for  perfectly  harmonious  effect  it  must 
be  there. 

A  strictly  simple  and  logical  linear  filling  of  such 
spaces  might  be  expressed  in  the  most  primitive 
way,  as  in  the  illustration  on  p.  109. 

By  these  means  certain  primitive  types  of  orna- 
ment are  evolved,  such  as  the  Greek  volute  and 
the  Greek  key  or  fret,  the  logical  ornament  of  a 
logical  people. 

Such  arrangements  of  line  form  simple  linear 
patterns,  and  a  decorative  effect  of  surface  is  pro- 
duced simply  by  their  repetition,  especially  if  the 
principle  of  alternation  be  observed.  This  prin- 
ciple may  be  expressed  by  taking,  say,  a  series  of 
squares  or  circles,  and  placing  them  either  in  aline 
as  for  a  border  arrangement,  or  for  extension  ver- 
tically and  laterally  over  a  surface,  and  filling  only 
the  alternate  square  or  circle,  leaving  the  alternate 
ones,  or  dropping  them  out  altogether  (see  illus- 
tration, p.  111). 

When  we  desire  to  go  beyond  such  primitive 
linear  ornaments,  however,  and  introduce  natural 
form,  we  should  still  be  guided  by  the  same  prin- 
ciples, if  we  desire  to  produce  a  strictly  decorative 
effect,  while  varying  them  in  application  to  any 
extent 

.  It  matters  not  what  forms  we  deal  with,  floral, 
animal,  human;  directly  we  come  to  combine  them 
in  a  design,  to  control  them  by  a  boundary,  to  in- 

1 10 


(§) 


<§» 


USE    OF   INTERVALS    IN    REPEATING   THE    SAME    ORNAMENTAL 

UNITS. 

I  I  I 


DESIGNS    OF    FLORAL,  HUMAN,   AND    ANIMAL    FORMS,    GOVERNED 
BY    SHAPE    OF    INCLOSING    BOUNDARY. 

I  12 


INFLUENCE  OF  CONTROLLING  LINES,  ETC. 
close  them  in  a  space,  we  shall  feel  this  necessity 
of  controlling  line,  which,  however  concealed,  is 
yet  essential  to  bring  them  into  that  harmonious 
relation  which  is  the  essence  of  all  design  (see 
illustration,  p.  1 12). 

We  may  take  it  as  a  general  rule  that  the  more 
purely  ornamental  the  purpose  of  our  design,  and 
j  the  more  abstract  in  form  it  is,  the  more  emphati- 
i  cally  we  may  carry  out  the  principle  of  corre- 
spondence of  line  between  that  of  the  inclosing 
boundary  and  that  of  the  design  itself ;  and,  vice 
versa,  as  the  design  becomes  more  pictorial  in  its 
appeal  and  more  complex  and  varied  in  its  ele- 
ments, the  more  we  may  combine  the  leading 
motive  or  principle  of  line  with  secondary  ones,  or 
with  variations,  since  every  fresh  element,  every 
new  direction  of  line,  every  new  form  introduced, 
demands  some  kind  of  re-echo  to  bring  it  into 
relation  with  the  other  elements  of  the  design,  or 
parts  of  the  composition,  whatever  may  be  its 
nature  and  purpose. 

Now,  if  we  seek  further  the  meaning  and  origin 
of  this  necessity  of  the  control  of  geometric  lines 
and  spaces  in  design,  I  think  we  shall  find  it  in  the 
constructive  necessities  of  architecture  :  for  it  is 
certainly  from  architecture  that  we  derive  those 
typical  spaces  and  panels  the  designer  is  so  often 
called  upon  to  fill. 

Lintel  architecture— the  Egyptian  and  the  Greek 
—gave  us  the  frieze,  both  continuous,  as  in  that  of 
the  Cella  of  the  Parthenon,  or  divided  by  triglyphs, 
which  represented  the  ends  of  the  beams  of  the 
primitive  timber  construction  ;  and  the  interstices 
left  between  these  determined  the  shape  of  the 

113  i 


PEDIMENT 


METOPE1? 


THE    PARTHENON  :     SKETCH    TO    SHOW    SPACES    USED    FOR 

DECORATIVE   SCULPTURE   IN   GREEK   ARCHITECTURE. 

114 


ORIGIN  OF  GEOMETRIC  DECORATIVE  SPACES 
sculptured  panel  or  slab  inserted,  and  influenced 
the  character  of  its  masses  and  the  lines  of  its  de- 


sign, which  was  under  the  necessity  of  harmonizing 
with  the  whole  building  (see  illustration,  p.  114). 

The  same  may  be  said  of  the  pediments.     The 
angle  of  the  low-pitched  roof  left  another  interstice 


ORIGIN  OF  GEOMETRIC  DECORATIVE  SPACES 
for  the  sculptor  at  each  end  of  the  building  ;  and  I 
have  elsewhere1  pointed  out  the  influence  of  the 
inclosing  space  and  the  angles  of  the  pediment  of 
the  Parthenon  upon  the  arrangement  of  the  groups 
within  it,  and  even  upon  the  lines  taken  by  some 
of  the  figures,  especially  the  reclining  figures  near 
the  acute  angles. 

Certain  lines  become  inseparably  associated  with 
constructive  expression,  and  are  used  to  emphasize 
it,  as  the  vertical  flutings  of  the  Doric  column,  by 
repeating  the  lines  of  the  column  itself,  emphasize 
its  constructive  expressionof  supporting  the  weight 
of  the  horizontal  lintels,  the  lines  of  which,  repeated 
in  the  mouldings  of  the  frieze  and  cornice,  are  as- 
sociated with  level  restfulness  and  secure  repose. 

As  examples  of  design  which,  while  meeting  the 
structural  necessities  and  acknowledging  the  con- 
trol of  space  and  general  conditions,  as  the  form 
of  the  slabs  upon  which  they  are  .sculptured,  yet 
expresses  independent  movement,  the  figures  of 
the  octagonal  tower  of  the  winds  at  Athens  are 
interesting  (see  illustration,  p.  115). 

Quite  a  different  feeling,  corresponding  to  dif- 
ferences in  conception  and  spirit  in  design,  comes 
in  with  the  Roman  round  arck,\v\\\\  its  allied  forms 
of  spandril  and  va^Ut,  lunette  and  medallion,  pre- 
senting new  spaces  for  the  surface  designer,  and 
new  suggestions  of  ornamental  line(see  illustration, 
p.  117).  It  is  noticeable  how,  with  the  round- 
arched  architecture  under  Roman,  Byzantine  (see 
illustration,  p.  118),  and  Renaissance  forms,  the 
scroll  form  of  ornament  developed,  the  reason  be- 
ing, I  think,  that  it  gave  the  necessary  element  of 
1  See  "  Bases  of  Design." 
Tl6 


SKETCH  OF  PART  OF  THE  ARCH  OF  CONSTANTINE  TO 
SHOW  SPACES  FOR  DECORATIVE  SCULPTURE  IN 
ROMAN  ARCHITECTURE. 


BYZANTINE    (MOSAIC)    TREATMENT     OF    ARCHITECTURAL    STRUC- 
TURAL   FEATURES  :    APSE,    S.    VITALE,    RAVENNA. 


VALUE  OF  RECURRING  LINE 
recurring  line,  whether  used  in  the  horizontal  frieze 
in  association  with  round  arches,  or  in  spandrilsof 
vaults  and  arcades,  and  on  marble  mosaic  pave- 
ments. 

The  development  of  Gothic  architecture,  with 

its    new    constructive    features   and   the    greater 

variety  of  geometric  spaces,  forms,  and  interstices 

\  which,  as  a  consequence,  were  available  for  the 

Idesigner  of  associated  ornament,  whether  carved 

work,  mosaic,  stained  glass,  or  painting,  naturally 

led  to  a  corresponding  variety  in  invention  and 

decorative  adaptation  ;  and  we  may  trace  the  same 

1  principle  at  work    in   other   forms — I    mean   the 

principle  of  corresponding,  counterbalancing,  and 

recurring   line — Gothic    ornament   being    indeed 

generally  an  essential  part  of  the  structure,  and 

architectural  features  being  constantly  repeated 

and  utilized  for  their  ornamental  value,  as  in  the 

case  of  canopies  and  tabernacle  work. 

We  see,  for  instance,  in  the  Decorated  period 
the  acute  gable  moulding  over  the  arched  recess, 
niche,  doorway,  or  tomb,  lightened  and  vivified  by 
a  floriated  finial  springing  into  vigorous  curves 
from  a  vertical  stem,  forming  an  emphatic  ogee 
outline  which  re-echoes  the  ogee  line  of  the  arch 
below,  and  is  taken  up  in  variations  by  the  crockets 
carved  upon  the  sides  of  the  gable;  and  their 
spiral  ascending  lines  lead  the  eye  up  to  the  finial 
which  completes  the  composition.  We  may  trace 
the  same  principle  in  the  carved  fillings  of  the  sub- 
sidiary parts,  such  as  the  trefoiled  panels,  the  se- 
condary mouldings,  and  the  cusps  of  the  arches, 
which  continue  the  line-motive  or  decorative  har- 
mony to  the  last  point  (see  illustration,  p.  120). 

119 


VALUE   OF   RECURRING  LINE 
The  elegance  and  lightness  of  the  pinnacles  is  in- 
creased in  the  same  way,  and  further  emphasized 


by  the  long  vertical  lines  of  the  sunk  panels  upon 
their  sides. 

In  church  doorways  we  may  see  certain  voussoirs 
of  the  arch  allowed  to  project  from  the  hollow  of 

1 20 


VALUE  OF  RECURRING  LINE 
the  concave  moulding,  and  their  surfaces  carved 
into  bosses  of  ornament  ;  while,  again,  the  doorway 


is  emphasized  by  the  recurring  lines  of  the  mould- 
ings, with  their  contrasting  planes  of  light  and 
shadow,  and  the  point  of  their  spring  is  marked 


121 


VALUE   OF   RECURRING   LINE 
by  a  carved  lion,  controlled  in  the  design  of  its 
contour  by  the  squareness  of  the  block  of  stone 
upon  which  it  is  carved  (see  illustration,  p.  121). 

The  carvings  of  miserere  seats  in  our  cathedral 
choirs  often  afford  instances  of  ingenious  design 
and  arrangement  of  elements  difficult  to  combine, 
yet. always  showing  the  instinct  of  following  the 
control  of  the  dominating  form  and  peculiar  lines 


of  the  seat  itself.  There  is  an  instance  of  one 
from  St.  David's  Cathedral — apparently  a  humor- 
ous satire — a  goose-headed  woman  offering  a  cake 
to  a  man-headed  gull  (?),  or  perhaps  they  are  both 
geese  !  I  won't  pretend  to  say,  but  it  evidently 
is  intended  to  suggest  cupboard  love,  and  there  is 
a  portentously  large  pitcher  of  ale  in  reserve  on 
the  bench.  But  note  the  clever  arrangement  of 
the  masses  and  lines,  and  how  the  lines  of  the 

122 


VALUE  OF  RECURRING  LINE 
seat  and  the  curves  of  the  terminating  scroll  are 
re-echoed  in  the  lines  of  the  figures  and  acces- 
sories. 

A  stone-carving  from  the  end  of  a  tomb  in  the 
same  cathedral — that  of  Bishop  John  Morgan, 
1504 — of  a  griffin  with  a  shield  shows  an  em- 
phatic repetition  of  the  inclosing  line  of  the 


arched  recess  in  the  curves  of  the  wings  which 
follow  it. 

There  is  also  a  charming  corbel  of  a  half-figure 
of  an  angel,  which,  though  somewhat  defaced, 
shows  the  architectural  sense  very  strongly  in  its 
design — the  vertical  droop  of  the  wing-feathers 
inclosing  the  figure  repeating  and  continuing  the 
vertical  lines  of  the  shafts  and  the  subsidiary 
mouldings  of  the  arrangement  of  the  drapery,  and 

123 


VALUE   OF   RECURRING   LINE 

its    termination    in    crisp    foliated    forms,   which 

pleasantly  counterbalance  the    set   of   the    scale 


feathers  of  the  wings  and  break  the  semicircular 
mouldings  of  the  base  of  the  corbel,  repeating 
those  of  the  shafts  above. 

Adaptation  to  spaces  upon  a  flat  surface  is  also 
124 


ADAPTABILITY  IN   DESIGN 

illustrated  in  some  tile   patterns  from   the  same 
place.     They  are  simple  and  rude  but  very  effec- 


•  GOTHIC  •  me  - 

•  PflTT£RM  - 

'S  DflVID'S  CATN' 


tive  bits  of  spacing,  and  show  a  thorough  grasp 
of  the  principles  we  have  been  considering — if, 
indeed,  it  is  so  far  conscious  work  at  all.  But 


ADAPTABILITY    IN    DESIGN 

whether  or  not  the  outcome  of  a  tradition  which 
seemed  to  be  almost  instinctive  with  mediaeval 
workmen — a  tradition  which  yet  left  the  individual 
free,  and  under  which  design  was  a  thing  of  life 
and  growth,  ever  adapting  itself  to  new  conditions, 
and  grafting  freely  new  inventions  to  flower  in 
fresh  phantasy  upon  the  ancient  stock — the  move- 
ment in  art  in  the  Middle  Ages,  exhibiting  as  it 
does  a  gradual  growth  and  a  constant  vitality, 
always  accompanying  and  adapting  itself  to 
structural  changes,  to  life  and  habit,  was  really 
more  analogous  to  the  development  of  mechanical 
science  in  our  own  day,  where  each  new  machine 
is  allied  to  its  predecessors,  though  it  supplants 
them.  The  one  law  being  adaptability,  the  one 
aim  to  apply  means  to  ends,  and  more  and  more 
perfectly,  inessentials  and  superfluities  are  shed, 
and  invention  triumphs.  It  is,  too,  a  collective 
advance,  since  each  engineer,  each  inventor,  builds 
upon  the  experience  of  both  his  forerunners  and 
his  fellow-workers,  and  everything  is  brought  to 
an  immediately  practical  test. 

We  are  not  yet  in  the  same  healthy  condition  as 
regards  art,  and  art  can  never  be  on  the  same 
plane  as  science,  though  art  may  learn  much 
from  science,  chiefly  perhaps  in  the  direction 
of  the  inventive  adaptation  of  analogous  prin- 
ciples, But  in  art  the  question  is  complicated  by 
human  feeling  and  association,  and  her  strongest 
appeal  is  to  these,  and  by  these,  and  as  yet  we  do 
not  seem  to  have  any  terms  or  equivalents  precise 
enough  to  describe,  or  any  analysis  fine  enough  to 
discover  them. 

The  next  consideration  in  spacing  we  may  term 
126 


EXTENSION 

extension.     This  bears  upon    all   surface  design, 
but  more  especially  upon  the  design  of  patterns 
intended  to  repeat  over  a  large  surface,  and  not 
specially  designed  for  particular  spaces.     It  is  a 
great  question  whether  any  design  can  be  entirely 
satisfactory  unless  it  has  been  thought  out  in  rela- 
tion to  some   particular  extent  of  surface  or  as 
adapted  to  some  particular  wall  or  room.   Modern 
industrial  conditions  preclude  this  possibility  as 
a  rule,  and  so  the  only  sure  ground,  beyond  in- 
dividual taste  and  preference,  is  technical  adapta- 
bility to  process  or  material.  We  should  naturally 
want  to  give  a  different  character  to  a  textile  pat- 
tern, whether  printed  or  woven,  and  intended  to 
hang  in  folds,  from  one  for  flat  extension  as  a  wall- 
paper ;    and  a  different    character  again  to  such 
designs  intended  for  extension  horizontally  from 
those  intended  for   vertical  space  alone.     Floor 
patterns,  parquets  and  carpets,  for  instance,  natur- 
ally demand    different    treatment  from    wall  pat- 
terns, as  those  orders  of  plants  in  nature  which 
cling  and  spread  on  the  flat  ground  differ  from 
those  which  grow  high  and  maintain  themselves 
in   the  air,  or  climb  upon  trees.     The  rule  of  life 
— adaptability — obtains  in  art  as  in  nature,  and, 
beneath  individual  preference  and  passing  fashion, 
works  the  silent  but  real  law  of  relation  to  condi- 
tions.    This  again  bears  upon  the  choice  of  scale, 
and  differentiates  the  design  of  dress  textiles  from 
furniture  textiles,  and  the  design  of  varied  sur- 
faces and  objects,  which,  while  demanding  their 
own  particular  treatment,  are  brought  into  general 
relation    by   their  association    with    use   and   the 
wa^ts  of  humanity. 

127 


WATTLED    FENCL 


C«U!LLOCHE 


2k       -£li»Si2.- 


PAINTED  WALL,  FOLLOW  INC, 
OF 


gRicK   ^c5TON/E  STRUCTURE 

EXTENSION  :    SURFACE    PATTERN    MOTIVES    DERIVED    FROM 

LINES    OF    STRUCTURE. 

128 


SURFACE    EXTENSION  :    REPEATING    PATTERNS   BUILT    UPON 
(l)    SQUARE    AND    (2)    CIRCULAR    BASIS. 

129  K 


GEOMETRIC    STRUCTURAL   PLANS,   ETC. 

The  law  governing  extension  of  design  over 
surface  is  again  geometric,  and  our  primal  circle 
and  square  are  again  the  factors  and  progenitors 
of  the  leading  systems  which  have  governed  the 
design  of  diapers  and  wall  patterns  and  hangings 
of  all  kinds.  Nay,  the  first  weaver  of  the  wattle  d 
fence  discovered  the  principle  of  extension  in 
design,  and  showed  its  inseparable  association 
with  construction  ;  and  the  builder  with  brick  or 
stone  emphasizes  it,  producing  the  elements  of 
linear  surface  pattern,  from  the  mechanical  neces- 
sity of  the  position  of  the  joints  of  his  structure. 
At  a  German  railway  station  waiting-room  I 
noticed  an  effective  adaptation  of  this  principle 
as  a  wall  decoration  in  two  blues  upon  a  stone 
colour  (see  illustration,  p.  128).  We  may  build 
upon  such  emphatic  structural  lines,  either  incor- 
porating them  with  the  design  motive,  as  in  all 
rectangular  wall  diapers,  or  we  may  suppress  or 
conceal  the  actual  constructive  lines  by  placing 
the  principal  parts  or  connections 'of  our  pattern 
over  them,  but  one  cannot  construct  a  satisfactory 
pattern  to  repeat  and  extend  without  them  ;  for 
these  constructive  lines  or  plans  give  the  neces- 
sary organic  life  and  vigour  to  such  designs,  and 
are  as  needful  to  them  as  the  trellis  to  the  tendrils 
of  the  vine  (see  illustration,  p.  129). 

The  same  principle  is  true  of  designs  upon  the 
curvilinear  plan.  The  mere  repetition  of  the 
circle  by  itself  gives  us  a  simple  geometric  pat- 
tern, and  we  are  at  liberty  to  emphasize  this  cir- 
cular plan  as  the  main  motive  ;  or,  as  in  the  case 
of  the  rectangular  plans,  to  treat  it  merely  as  a 
basis,  and  develop  free  scroll  motives  upon  it;  or 


SURFACE    EXTENSION  :    PLAN    OF    A    DROP    REPEAT. 


GEOMETRIC  STRUCTURAL  PLANS,  ETC. 
follow  it  through  its  principal  variations,  as  in  the 
ogee,  formed  by  dropping  out  two  intermediate 
semicircles  ;  or  the  various  forms  of  the  scale 
arrangement.  These  simple  geometric  plans  are 
the  most  generally  useful  as  plans  of  designs  in- 
tended for  repetition  and  extension  over  space, 
and  they  are  always  safe  and  sound  systems  to 
build  upon,  since  a  geometric  plan  is  certain  to 
join  comfortably  if  our  measurements  are  right. 

We  may,  however,  often  feel  that  we  want 
something  bolder  and  freer,  and  start  with  a 
motive  of  sweeping  curves,  non-geometric,  but 
even  then  a  certain  geometric  relation  will  be 
necessary,  or  an  equivalent  for  it,  since  each  curve 
must  be  counterbalanced  in  some  way,  though 
not  necessarily  symmetrically,  of  course ;  and 
even  where  a  square  of  pattern — say  to  a  wall- 
paper repeat  of  twenty-one  inches — has  been  de- 
signed, not  consciously  upon  a  geometric  base,  but 
simply  as  a  composition  of  lines  and  masses  to 
repeat,  the  mechanical  conditions  of  the  work 
when  it  comes  to  be  printed  will  supply  a  certain 
geometric  control,  since  it  necessarily  begins  in 
the  process  of  repetition  a  series  of  squares  of 
pattern  in  which  the  curves  are  bound  to  recur 
in  corresponding  places.  Without  a  geometric 
plan  of  some  sort,  however,  we  may  easily  get 
into  difficulties  with  awkward  leading  lines,  gaps, 
or  masses,  that  tumble  down,  and  are  only  per- 
ceived when  the  paper  is  printed  and  hung. 

The  designer  should  not  feel  at  all  restricted  or 
cramped  by  his  geometric  plan,  but  treat  it  as  an 
aid  and  a  scaffolding,  working  in  as  much  variety 
and  richness  of  detail  as  he  likes,  bound  only  by 

132 


FRIEZE   AND    FIELD 

the  necessity  of  repeating  or  counterbalancing  his 
forms  and  lines.  In  the  diagram  (p.  131)  the 
plan  of  making  a  repeat  less  obvious  by  means  of 
what  is  termed  "a  drop"  is  given,  and  this 
system  also  increases  the  apparent  width  of  a 
pattern. 

The  feeling  which  demands  some  kind  of  con- 
trast or  relief  to  a  field  of  repeating  pattern,  how- 
ever interesting  in  itself,  seems  now  almost  in- 
stinctive. It  is  felt,  too,  in  the  case  of  plain  sur- 
faces, where  the  eye  seeks  a  moulding  to  give  a 
little  variety  or  pattern-equivalent  in  play  of  light 
and  shadow  upon  different  planes,  lines,  or  con- 
cavities and  convexities.  The  common  plaster 
cornice  placed  to  unite  walls  and  ceiling,  in  our 
ordinary  houses,  is  a  concession  (on  the  part  even 
of  the  jerriest  of  builders)  to  the  aesthetic  sense. 
We  get  the  decorated  frieze  in  architecture  in 
obedience  to  the  same  demand,  though  originally 
a  necessary  feature  of  lintel  construction,  as  we 
have  seen,  from  the  days  of  the  festal  garland 
hung  around  the  eaves  of  the  classic  house,  to  its 
perpetuation  in  stone  in  so  many  varieties.1  The 
carved  garland  depending  in  a  series  of  graceful 
curves,  or  contrasted  with  pendants,  or  their 
rhythm  punctuated,  as  it  were,  by  ox-heads,  as  on 
the  temple  of  the  Sibyls,  Tivoli,  formed  the 
needed  contrast  to  the  plane  masonry  of  the  wall 
below.  Sculptured  figures,  with  the  added  in- 
terest of  story,  as  on  the  choragic  monument  of 
Lysicrates,  fulfilled  the  same  decorative  function 
in  a  more  complex  and  elaborate  way. 

To  satisfy  the  same  feeling  we  place  a  frieze 
1  See  "  Bases  of  Design." 

J33 


FRIEZE  AND   FIELD 

above  the  patterned  field  of  our  modern  wall- 
papers. Such  a  frieze  may  be  considered  as  a 
contrasting  border  to  the  pattern  of  the  field, 
much  as  the  border  of  a  carpet,  allowing  for 
difference  of  material  and  position  ;  or  the  frieze 
may  assert  itself  as  the  dominant  decoration  of 
the  room.  In  this  case  it  would  be  greater  in 
depth  than  the  simpler  bordering  type.  The 
interest  df  the  field  filling  would  then  be  sub- 
sidiary, arid  lead  up  to  the  frieze.  In  wall-paper 
friezes  the  difficulty  in  designing  is  to  think  of  a 
motive  which  will  not  tire  the  eye  in  the  neces- 
sarily frequent  repeats  of  twenty-one  inches. 
Longer  ones  have  occasionally  been  produced, 
the  limit  being  sixty  inches.  It  is  often  a  good 
plan  to  recur  in  the  main  lines  or  forms  of  the 
frieze  to  some  variation  of  the  lines  or  forms  of 
the  field.  If,  for  instance,  the  main  motive  in  the 
field  was  a  vertical  scroll  design,  a  horizontal  scroll 
design  upon  a  large  scale  used  for  the  frieze 
would  answer,  the  field  being  kept  flat  and  quiet ; 
or  the  fan,  or  radiating  shell  form,  used  as  a  frieze, 
above  a  pattern  on  the  scale  plan,  would  be  quite 
harmonious.  Relation  and  balance  of  line  and 
mass,  and  arrangement  of  quantities  in  such 
designs,  are  the  chief  considerations. 

With  painting  or  modelling  an  artist  is  freer, 
as  he  is  at  liberty  to  design  a  continuous  frieze 
of  figures,  and  introduce  as  much  variety  as  he 
chooses. 

A  painted  frieze  of  figures  above  plain  oak- 
panelling  has  a  good  effect  in  a  large  and  well- 
proportioned  room,  and  is  perhaps  one  of  the 
pleasantest  ways  of  treating  interior  walls. 

134 


SKETCH    DESIGNS    TO    SHOW  RELATION    BETWEEN    FRIEZE  AND 
FIELD    IN    WALL-PAPER. 

135 


CEILING   DECORATION 

Ceiling  decoration,  again,  presents  problems  of 
extension  in  designing,  and  the  large  flat  plaster 
ceilings  of  modern  rooms  are  by  no  means  easy 
to  deal  with  satisfactorily.  The  simplest  way  is 
to  resort  to  wall-paper,  and  here,  restricted  in  size 
of  repeat  and  the  usual  technical  requirements  of 
the  work,  the  designer  must  further  consider  ap- 
propriateness of  scale,  and  position  in  regard  to 
eye,  relation  to  the  wall,  and  so  forth. 

The  natural  demand  is  for  something  simpler 
in  treatment  than  the  walls — a  re-echo,  in  some 
sort,  of  plans  agreeable  to  the  floor,  yet  with  a 
suggestion  of  something  lighter  and  freer:  here 
we  may  safely  come  back  to  rectangular  and  cir- 
cular plans  again  for  our  leading  lines  and  forms. 

Painting  and  modelling,  again,  offer  more  ela- 
borate treatment  and  possibilities,  and  we  know 
that  beautiful  works  have  been  done  in  both 
ways  ;  but  art  of  this  kind  seems  more  appropriate 
to  lofty  vaulted  chambers  and  churches,  such  as 
one  sees  in  the  palaces  of  Italy,  at  Genoa  and 
Venice,  at  Florence  and  Rome. 

I  remember  a  very  striking  and  bold  treatment 
of  a  flat-beamed  ceiling  in  the  Castle  of  Nurem- 
berg, where  a  huge  black  German  eagle  was 
painted  so  as  to  occupy  nearly  the  whole  field  of 
the  ceiling,  but  treated  in  an  extremely  flat  and 
heraldic  way,  the  long  feathers  of  the  wings  fol- 
lowing the  lines  of  the  beams  and  falling  parallel 
upon  them  and  between  them ;  and  upon  the 
black  wings  and  body  of  the  eagle  different  shields 
of  arms  were  displayed  in  gold  and  colours,  the 
eagle  itself  being  painted  upon  the  natural  un- 
painted  wood — oak,  I  think.  The  work  belonged 

136 


CO-OPERATIVE    RELATION 

to  the  thirteenth  or  fourteenth  century,  1  believe. 
It  seemed  the  very  antithesis  of  Italian  finesse 
and  fancy,  but  the  fitness  of  such  decoration 
entirely  depends  upon  its  relation  to  its  surround- 
ings, which  in  this  case  were  perfectly  appropriate. 
That  is  the  great  point  to  bear  in  mind  in  all 
design — the  sense  of  relation  ;  nothing  stands 
alone  in  art.  Lines  and  forms  must  harmonize 
with  other  forms  and  lines  :  the  elements  of  any 
design  must  meet  in  friendly  co-operation ;  it  is 
not  a  blind  struggle  for  existence,  a  fierce  com- 
petition, or  a  strife  for  ascendency  between  one 
motive  and  another,  one  form  and  another,  or  a 
war  of  conflicting  efforts.  There  may  be  a  struggle 
outside  the  design,  in  the  mind  of  the  designer. 
He  may  have  tried  hard  against  difficulties  to 
express  what  he  felt,  and  have  only  reached  har- 
mony through  discord  and  strife,  but  the  work 
itself  should  be  serene  ;  we  should  feel  that,  how- 
ever various  its  elements,  they  are  not  without 
their  purpose  and  relation  one  to  another,  that  all 
is  ordered  and  organized  in  harmonious  lines,  that 
everything  has  its  use  and  place,  that,  in  short,  it 
illustrates  that  excellent  motto,  whether  for  art  or 
life  :  "  Each  for  all,  and  all  for  each." 


137 


CHAPTER   VI 

Of  the  Fundamental  Essentials  of  Design  :  Line,  Form, 
Space — Principles  of  Structural  and  Ornamental  Line  in  Or- 
ganic Forms — Form  and  Mass  in  Foliage — Roofs — The  Medi- 
aeval City — Organic  and  Accidental  Beauty — Composition  : 
Formal  and  Informal — Power  of  Linear  Expression — Relation 
of  Masses  and  Lines — Principles  of  Harmonious  Composition. 

WE  may  take  it,  then,  from  the  principles 
and  examples  I  have  endeavoured  to  put 
before  you  in  the  previous  chapters,  that  there 
are  three  fundamental  elements  or  essentials  of 
Design — Line,  'Form,  Space. 

Line  we  need,  not  only  for  our  ground-plan 
and  framework,  but  also  to  define  or  express  our 
forms.  Form  we  need  to  give  substance  and 
mass,  interest  and  variety  ;  and  it  is  obvious  that 
Space  is  required  to  contain  all  these  elements, 
while  Space  asserts  its  influence,  as  we  have  seen, 
upon  both  Line  and  Form  in  combination  upon 
it,  whether  object  or  surface,  by  the  shape  of  its 
boundary,  the  extension  of  its  plane,  and  the  angle 
and  position  of  its  plane  in  regard  to  the  eye,  as 
well  as  from  the  point  of  view  of  material  and  use. 

Questions  of  the  character  of  line  and  form, 
and  their  combination  and  disposition  in  or  over 
spaces,  are  questions  of  composition.  They  de- 
mand the  most  careful  solution,  whatever  our  sub- 

138 


FUNDAMENTAL  ESSENTIALS  OF  DESIGN 
ject  and  purpose  may  be,  from  the  simplest  linear 
border  up  to  the  most  elaborate  figure  design. 
But  although  the  three  essentials  to  composition 
must  be  always  present,  it  is  always  possible  to 
rely  more  upon  the  qualities  of  one  of  them  for 
our  main  motive  and  interest,  keeping  the  other 
two  subsidiary.  We  might  centralize  the  chief 
interest  of  our  composition  upon  Line,  for  in- 
stance, and  make  harmonious  relation  or  combina- 
tion of  lines  our  principal  object  (as  in  line- 
design  and  ornament),  or  we  might  rather  dwell 
upon  the  contours,  masses,  and  contrasts  and 
relationships  of  Form :  as  in  pictorial  design, 
figure  compositions  of  all  kinds,  and  'modelling 
and  sculpture:  or,  again,  we  might  choose  that 
the  peculiar  character  given  by  the  control  of 
certain  inclosing  spaces  should  determine  the 
interest  of  our  design,  as  the  due  filling  of  par- 
ticular panels  and  geometric  shapes  ;  or  seek  the 
interest  of  aerial  perspective  in  the  pictorial  and 
atmospheric  expression  of  space. 

Taking  combinations  of  Line  first,  and  bearing 
in  mind  what  has  been  said  regarding  its  capa- 
cities for  expression,  whether  of  emotion,  direction 
of  force,  movement,  rest,  as  well  as  of  facts  of  struc- 
ture and  surface,  let  us  see  if  we  can  trace  the  prin- 
ciple of  harmonious  composition,  of  which  these 
things  may  be  considered  as  parts. 

Look  at  any  of  the  systems  of  line  in  the  organic 
structures  of  nature  :  the  radiating  ribs  of  the  scal- 
lop shell,  or  the  spiral  of  many  other  varieties  ;  the 
set  of  the  feathers  upon  the  expanded  wing  of  a 
bird  ;  the  radiation  of  the  sun's  rays  ;  the  flowing 
line  of  the  wave  movement ;  the  lines  of  structure 

139 


PRINCIPLES    OF    STRUCTURAL   AND    ORNAMENTAL    LINE    IN 

NATURAL    FORMS. 

I4O 


LINE   IN   ORGANIC    FORMS 

in  flowers  and  leaves  ;  the  scales  of  a  fish  ;  the 
scales  of  a  pine-cone  or  an  artichoke.  We  feel 
that  any  of  these  combinations  of  lines  are  harmo- 
nious and  beautiful,  and  we  know  that  they  are 
essential  to  the  character  and  structure.  They  are 
organic  lines,  in  short.  They  mean  life  and  growth. 
In  principle  they  are  radiating  and  recurring  lines  ; 
in  each  form  they  repeat  each  other  in  varying  de- 
grees of  direction  and  declension  of  curve.  No 
two  lines  are  alike,  yet  there  is  no  contradiction 
and  no  unnecessary  line,  and  variety  is  combined 
with  unity.  Each  affords  a  perfect  instance  of 
harmonious  composition  of  line,  and  gives  us  de- 
finite principles  upon  which  to  work  (see  illustra- 
tion, p.  140). 

These  systems  of  line  in  organic  nature  have 
been  adopted  and  adapted  by  art,  and  are  found 
throughout  the  historical  forms  of  ornament  which, 
as  we  have  good  reason  to  believe,  were  often  de- 
rived from  mechanical  structures,  illustrating  the 
same  principles  ;  which,  again,  the  logic  of  geo- 
metry enforces  in  drawing  on  plane  surfaces. 

All  organic  structures  teach  us  the  same  lesson 
of  relation  and  recurrence  of  line.  The  bones  of 
all  vertebrate  animals,  from  fish  to'man,  illustrate 
the  constant  repetition  in  different  degrees  of  the 
same  character  and  direction  of  line.  The  verte- 
bral column  itself  is  an  instance,  and  the  recurring 
spring  of  the  ribs  from  it,  like  the  branches  from 
the  stem  of  a  tree,  further  expressed  in  the  ramifi- 
cation of  the  jointed  bones  of  the  limbs  and  extrem- 
ities. The  principle  may  be  followed  out  in  the 
structure  of  the  muscles  in  their  radiating  fibres, 
which  the  delicate  contours  and  flowing  lines  of 

141 


RADIATING,  RECURRING  AND  COUNTERBALANCING  LINES  IN  THE 
STRUCTURE   OF   THE   SKELETON   AND   THE    MUSCLES. 


142 


GENERAL    PRINCIPLES    OF  LINE    AND    FORM    IN   THE    BRANCHING 
AND    FOLIAGE    MASSES    OF    TREES. 

'43 


LINE   IN   ORGANIC   FORMS 

the  surface  of  the  body  only  combine  in  a  greater 

degree  of  subtlety  (see  illustration,  p.  142). 

Look  at  the  anatomy  of  any  tree,  as  it  is  dis- 
closed to  us  in  its  wintry  leaflessness,  a  beautiful 
composition  of  line  rather  than  of  form  (see  illus- 
tration, p.  143). 

Here  we  see  organic  life  and  structure  expressed 
in  the  vigorous  spring  of  inter-dependent  and  cor- 
responding curves,  from  the  rigid  sinuous  column 
of  the  main  stem  springing  from  the  ground,  pre- 
sently divided  into  the  main  forks  of  the  branches, 
which  again  subdivide  and  subdivide  into  smaller 
forks,  so  that  the  tree  may  sustain  and  spread  its 
life  in  the  air  and  the  sun,  both  supporting  and 
continuing  its  existence  by  this  wonderful  economic 
system  of  co-operative,  subdivided,  and  graduated 
helpfulness. 

The  massive  green  pavilion  of  summer,  which 
this  delicate  vaulting  of  branch-work  sustains, 
gives  us  another,  more  sumptuous,  but  perhaps 
not  a  greater  beauty  in  the  combination  or 
substitution  of  form  and  mass  for  line  composi- 
tion. 

We  might  express,  in  an  abstract  way,  the  prin- 
ciple of  the  line-structure  of  the  ramifying  tree  by 
super-imposing  vertically  fork  upon  fork  in  gradu- 
ally diminishing  scale,  either  curvilinear  or  rect- 
angular ;  and  the  principle  of  the  mass-structure 
in  the  formation  of  the  foliage  might  be  expressed 
by  a  series  of  overlapping  curves,  suggestive  of 
scales  or  cloud  masses  :  to  both  of  which  indeed 
they  correspond  in  principle,  illustrating  the  scale 
principle  in  detail  and  the  cloud  principle  in  the 
mass ;  thus  repeating  the  same  general  law  of 

144 


it    ALTERNATE 
PRINCIPLES   OF 
GROWTH. 


SYMMETRIC 

PRINCIPLE  OF 

CR.6WTH 


PRINCIPLES   OF  STRUCTURE    IN    FOLIAGE   MASSES. 

145 


FORM    AND    MASS    IN    FOLIAGE 

natural  roofing,  or  covering,  in  different  materials 

(see  illustration,  p.  145). 

In  a  mass  of  foliage  each  leaf  falls  partly  over 
the  one  below  it,  as  by  the  system  of  their  growth 
and  suspension  upon  the  stem  they  are  of  course 
bound  to  do,  whether  symmetric  or  alternate  in  their 
arrangement,  the  gaps  caused  by  decay  oraccidtnt 
being  generally  filled  by  new  shoots.  Each  shoot, 
eager  to  expand  its  leaves  in  the  light,  ever  spread- 


ALBERT    DURER  :    DETAIL    FROM      *  THE   PRODIGAL    SON." 

ing,  forms  mass  after  mass  of  the  beautiful  green 
panoply — the  coat  armour  of  the  forest,  arborea 
man's  first  form  of  domestic  architecture. 

The  principle  of  structure  here  is  just  the  same 
as  the  overlapping  principle  of  the  tiles  and  slates 
upon  our  ordinary  house-roofs  ;  but  each  leafy  tile 
is  different,  being  alive,  and  in  the  mass  infinitely 
varied  and  beautiful  in  form  and  colour,  instead  of 
being  mechanical  and  uniform,  as  we  try  to  make 
our  artificial  roofs. 

Very  pretty  and  varied  effects  are  produced  in 
146 


GERMAN   ROOFS 

the  old  roofs  of  southern  Germany  by  the  use  of 
different  coloured  glazed  tiles — red,  green,  and 
yellow — arranged  in  simple  patterns.  One  of  the 


ALBERT    DURER  :    ST.    ANTHONY. 


old  towers  at  Lindau  has  such  a  roof,  and  the  colour 
effect  is  very  rich  and  striking. 

But  I  must  not  be  led  into  a  disquisition  upon 
roofs  further  than  in  so  far  as  they  illustrate  the 
subject  of  composition  of  line  and  form,  and  from 

147 


GERMAN   ROOFS 

the  painter's  point  of  view  they  frequently  do  in  a 

very  delightful  and  instructive  way. 

What,  for  instance,  can  be  more  varied  and 
charming  than  the  compositions  we  constantly  meet 
with  in  the  rich  backgrounds  of  Albert  Durer  ? 
Those  steep  barn  roofs,  and  those  quaint  German 
towns  inclosed  in  walls  with  protecting  towers  — 
nests  of  steep  tiled  gables  of  every  imaginable  de- 
gree— which  give  so  much  character  and  interest 
to  his  designs,  as  in  the  background  of  his  copper- 
plates " The  Prodigal  Son"  and  "St.  Anthony"  here 
given.  Their  prototypes  still  exist  here  and  there 
in  Germany,  in  such  towns  as  Rothenburg,  prac- 
tically unchanged  since  the  sixteenth  century,  and 
give  one  an  excellent  idea  of  what  such  houses 
were  like.  A  visit  there  is  like  a  leap  back  into 
the  Middle  Ages.  Every  street  is  a  varied  and 
interesting  composition.  No  two  houses  are  alike. 
They  were  built  by  the  citizens  to  really  pass  their 
lives  in.  The  town  is  strongly  placed  upon  the 
crest  of  a  hill,  with  a  river  at  its  foot,  and  well  for- 
tified and  protected  by  massive  encircling  walls 
and  towers  and  deep  gates,  which  give  it  so  strong 
and  picturesque  a  character,  while  the  timber  and 
tile-roofed  gallery  for  the  warders  still  exists  along 
the  inside  of  the  walls.  Such  cities  arose  by  the 
strength  of  the  social  bond  among  men — the  neces- 
sity for  mutual  help  in  the  maintenance  of  a  higher 
standard  of  life,  and  mutual  protection  against  the 
ravages  of  sinister  powers. 

Strong  externally,  internally  they  were  made  as 
home-like  and  full  of  the  varied  delight  of  the  eyes, 
as  if  the  people  had  reasoned,  "  Since  we  must  live 
close  together  in  a  small  place,  let  us  make  it  as 

148 


THE    MEDIEVAL   CITY 


ROOF-LINES  :    ROTHENBURG. 


delightful  and  romantic  as  we  can."  We  know 
that  the  idea  of  Paradise  and  the  New  Jerusalem 
to  the  imagination  of  the  Middle  Ages  was  always 

149 


THE   MEDIAEVAL   CITY 

the  fair  walled  garden  and  the  fenced  city.  The 
painters  embodied  the  idea  of  security  and  protec- 
tion from  the  savage  and  destructive  forces  of 
nature  and  man — a  sanctuary  of  peace,  a  garden 
of  delight. 

We  have  in  modern  times  turned  rather  from  the 
city  as  a  complete  and  beautiful  thing,  to  the  indi- 
vidual home,  and  to  the  interior  of  that,  and,  in  the 
modern  competitive  search  for  the  necessary  straws 
and  sticks  to  make  our  individualist-domestic 
composition  of  comfort  and  artistic  completeness, 
bowers  are  too  often builtupon  the  ruins  of  others,or 
are  fair  by  reason  of  surrounding  degradation.  The 
common  collective  comfort  and  delight  of  the  eyes 
is  too  often  ignored,  so  that  it  comes  about  that,  if 
our  modern  cities  possess  any  elements  of  beauty  or 
picturesqueness,  it  is  rather  owing  to  accidents  and 
to  the  transfiguring  effects  of  atmosphere  than  to  the 
beauty  or  variety  of  architectural  form  and  colour. 
We  have  to  seek  inspiration  among  the  fragments 
of  the  dead  past  in  monuments  and  art  schools. 

The  modern  development  of  the  municipality 
and  extension  of  its  functions  may,  indeed,  do 
something,  as  it  has  done,  and  is  doing,  something 
to  protect  public  health  and  further  public  educa- 
tion ;  but  we  have  yet  to  wait  for  the  full  results, 
and  everything  must  finally  depend  upon  the  public 
spirit  and  disinterestedness  of  the  citizens,  and  in 
matters  of  art  upon  a  very  decided  but  somewhat 
rare  and  peculiar  sympathy  and  taste,  as  well  as 
enthusiasm. 

The  absence  of  beauty  of  line,  form,  and  propor- 
tion from  the  external  aspects  of  daily  life  in  towns 
has  probably  a  greater  effect  than  we  are  apt  to 

150 


ORGANIC  AND  ACCIDENTAL  BEAUTY 
realize  in  deadening  the  imagination,  and  it  cer- 
tainly seems  to  produce  a  certain  insensibility  to 
beauty  of  line  and  composition,  since  the  percep- 
tion must  necessarily  be  blunted  by  being  inured 
to  the  commonplace  and  sordid.  The  instinct  for 
harmony  of  line  and  form  becomes  weakened,  and 
can  only  be  slowly  revived  by  long  and  careful 
study  in  art,  instead  of  finding  its  constant  and 
most  vital  stimulus  in  every  street. 

For  all  that,  however,  an  eye  trained  to  observe 
and  select  may,  even  in  the  dullest  and  dingiest 
street,  find  artistic  suggestions,  if  not  in  the  build- 
ings, then  in  the  life.  And  where  there  is  life, 
movement,  humanity,  there  is  sure  to  be  character 
and  interest.  Groups  of  children  playing  will  give 
us  plenty  of  suggestions  for  figure  composition. 
Workpeople  going  to  and  from  their  work,  the 
common  works  going  on  in  the  street,  the  waggons 
and  horses,  the  shoal  of  faces,  the  ceaseless  stream 
of  life — all  these  things,  whether  we  are  able  to  re- 
produce them  as  direct  illustrations  of  the  life  of  our 
time,  or  are  moved  only  to  select  from  them  vivid 
suggestions  to  give  force  to  ideal  conceptions, 
should  all  be  noted — photographed,  as  it  were,  in- 
stantaneously upon  the  sensitive  plate  of  the  mind's 
vision.  We  can  only  learn  the  laws  of  movement 
by  observing  movement — the  swing  and  poise  of 
the  figure,  the  relation  of  the  lines  of  limbs  and 
drapery  to  the  direction  of  force  and  centre  of 
gravity,  so  important  in  composition.  We  must 
constantly  supplement  our  school  and  studio  work 
by  these  direct  impressions  of  vivid  life  and  move- 
ment, and  neglect  no  opportunity  or  despise  no 
source  or  suggestion. 


FORMAL   COMPOSITION 

There  are  still  in  England  to  be  found  such  old- 
world  corners  as  the  quaint  street  of  Canterbury 
(p.  153),  which  forms  an  excellent  study  in  the 
composition  of  angular  and  vertical  lines. 

We  may  perceive  that  there  are  at  least  two 
kinds  of  composition,  which  may  be  distinguished 
as : 

I.  Formal. 

II.  Informal. 

I.  Under  the  head  of  Formal  may  be  classed 
all  those  systems  of  structural  line  with  which  I 
started,  and  which  are  found  either  as  leading 
motives  or  fundamental  plans  and  bases  through- 
out ornamental  design.  Yet  even  these  may  be 
used  in  composition  of  figures  and  other  forms 
where  the  object  is  more  or  less  formal  and  deco- 
rative, as  governing  plans  or  controlling  lines. 

The  radiating  ribs  of  a  fan,  for  instance,  might 
be  utilized  as  the  natural  boundaries  and  inclosing 
lines  of  a  series  of  vertical  figures  following  the 
radiating  lines.  A  strictly  logical  design  of  the 
kind  would  be  a  series  of  figures  with  uplifted 
arms,  forming  radiating  lines  from  the  shoulders, 
somewhat  in  the  position  of  Blake's  well-known 
and  beautiful  composition  of  the  Morning  Stars  in 
the  Book  of  Job,  already  illustrated. 

Using  the  overlapping  vertical  scale  plan  we 
should  get  relative  positions  for  a  formal  composi- 
tion of  three  figures,  although  they  need  not  neces- 
sarily be  formal  in  detail.  A  typical  design  of 
three  associated  ideas  treated  emblematically 
would  be  the  most  natural  use  of  such  an  ar- 
rangement— as  Faith,  Hope,  and  Charity  ;  Liberty, 
Equality,  Fraternity;  Science,  Art,  and  Indus- 


^o 


153 


FORMAL   COMPOSITION 

try ;  or  the  three  goddesses  Here,  Pallas,  and 
Aphrodite,  as  choice  and  purpose  might  decide. 
A  semicircular  scale  plan  would  not  only  repeat 
in  a  safe  and  sound  manner,  but  would  afford 
suggestive  shapes  in  which  to  throw  designs  of 
figures,  and  could  be  effectively  utilized  either  for 
a  wall  or  ceiling  repeat. 

The  inclosure  formed  by  two  spiral  lines  gives 
a  graceful  ornamental  shape  for  a  half-reclining 
•figure ;  while  a  series  of  floating  or  flying  figures 
linking  their  hands  would  be  appropriately 
governed  by  similar  spiral  lines,  uniting  them  with 
the  meandering  wave  line  (see  illustration,  p.  155). 

Upon  a  series  of  semicircles  or  ellipses,  alter- 
nating horizontally,  might  be  arranged  a  little 
frieze  of  children  with  skipping  ropes,  or  Amorini 
with  pendent  garlands  ;  the  up-and-down  move- 
ment in  the  former  case  being  conveyed  by  a 
variation,  each  alternate  semicircle  being  struck 
upwards.  This  would  restore  the  emphatic  wave 
or  spiral  line,  which  always  conveys  the  sense  of 
rhythmic  movement  in  a  design. 

Such  a  line,  vertically  employed,  will  give  again 
a  good  plan  for  a  series  of  seated  figures,  say  em- 
blematic of  the  Hours,  where  similarity  of  attitude 
and  type  would  be  appropriate,  while  the  emblems 
and  accessories  might  be  varied.  A  severer  treat- 
ment would  be  suggested  by  making  the  controlling 
line  angular  (see  illustration,  p.  1 56). 

Such  are  a  few  illustrations  of  what  I  have 
termed  formal  composition,  in  which  the  geo- 
metric and  structural  plans  of  pure  ornament  or 
ornamental  line  maybe  utilized  to  combine, control, 
or  even  suggest  figure  designs. 

154 


FORMAL   COMPOSITION  :    FIGURE  DESIGNS   CONTROLLED    BY 
GEOMETRIC    BOUNDARIES. 

'55 


FORMAL   COMPOSITION  :    FIGURE   DESIGNS   CONTROLLED   BY 
GEOMETRIC    BOUNDARIES. 


INFORMAL   COMPOSITION 

II.  While  formal  compositions,  though  natur- 
ally falling  into  classes  and  types,  may  be  varied 
to  a  very  great  extent,  when  we  come  to  informal 
compositions  the  variations  are  unlimited,  and  a 
vista  of  extraordinary  and  apparently  endless 
choice,  invention,  and  selection  opens  out  before 
the  designer,  co-extensive  with  the  variety  of 
nature  herself. 

In  seeking  harmonious  and  expressive  composi- 
tion in  the  pictorial  direction  the  guides  are  much 
less  definite  and  secure.     Individual  feeling  and 
instinct,  which  must  have  an  important  influence 
in    all   kinds  of  designing,  are   in  this  direction 
paramount.  Yet  even  here,  if  we  look  beneath  the 
apparent  freedom  and  informality,  we  find  certain 
laws  at  work  which  seem  to  differ  only  in  degree 
from  the  more  definite  and  constructive  control  of 
.line  which  we  have  been  considering.     In  the  first 
place,  there  are  our  direct  impressions  from  nature; 
and,  secondly,  our  conscious  aims  and  efforts  to 
'express  an  idea  in  our  minds.     We  have  the  same 
restricted    and    definite   forms  of  language  and 
materials  in  each  case — line,  form,  space,  brushes, 
pencil,  colour,  paper,   canvas,   or  clay.     We   are 
taken  by  some  particular  scene  :  the  composition 
of  line  and  form  at  a  particular  spot  attracts  us 
more  than  another.     We  do  not  stop  as  a  rule  to 
ask    why,    since    it    usually   takes    all    our  time 
and  our  best  skill  to  get  into  shape  what  we  are 
seeking — and  carry  away  with  us  an  artistic  record 
of  the  place.     We  have  seen  that  in  the  case  of 
certain  natural  structures,  shells,  leaves,  flowers, 
the  fundamental  structural  lines  are  so  beautiful 
that  they  not  only  form  ornament  in  themselves, 

157 


INFORMAL  COMPOSITION 

but  furnish  the  basis  for  whole  types  and  families 
of  ornament.  When  we  look  at  a  landscape, 
putting  aside  for  the  moment  all  the  surface 
charms  of  colour  and  effect,  and  concentrating  our 
attention  upon  its  lines  of  structures,  we  shall  find 
that  it  owes  a  great  part  of  its  beauty  to  the  har- 
monious relation  of  its  leading  lines,  or  to  certain 
I  pleasant  contrasts,  or  a  certain  impressiveness  of 
form  and  mass,  and  at  the  same  time  we  shall 
perceive  that  this  linear  expression  is  inseparable 
from  the  sentiment  or  emotion  suggested  by  that 
particular  scene. 

A  gentle  southern  landscape  -  -  undulating 
downs,  and  wandering  sheep-walks  ;  the  soft 
rounded  masses  of  the  sheep  upon  smooth 
cropped  turf — all  these  are  so  many  notes  or 
words  in  the  language  of  line  and  form  which  go 
to  express  the  idea  of  pastoral  life.  They  are  in- 
extricably bound  up  with  inseparable  associations 
conveyed  by  such  lines  and  forms.  The  un- 
dulating lines  of  resting  or  dancing  figures  would 
only  give  point,  true  emphasis,  and  variety,  and  a 
note  of  contrast  in  the  forms  would  serve  to  bring 
out  the  general  sentiment  more  strongly. 

Substitute  rugged  rocks,  swollen  torrents,  wind- 
tossed  trees  and  stormy  skies,  and  all  is  changed. 
Such  things  cannot  be  expressed  without  much 
more  emphatic  lines  and  masses,  and  the  use  of 
opposing  angles  and  energetic  curves  of  move- 
ment which  would  be  destructive  of  the  sentiment 
of  peace,  in  other  cases.  Yet  even  then  to  convey 
the  expression  of  energy  and  rapid  movement, 
concerted  groups  of  lines  are  none  the  less  neces- 
sary (see  illustration,  p.  159). 

158 


INFORMAL  COMPOSITION:  EXPRESSION  OF  (i)  STORM  AND 

(2)    CALM    IN    LANDSCAPE. 


INFORMAL   COMPOSITION 

Such  comparisons  indicate  not  only  that  there 
is  a  necessary  association  of  ideas  with  certain 
lines  and  forms,  but  also  that  certain  relations 
and  associations  of  line  of  a  similar  character 
are  necessary  to  produce  a  harmonious  composi- 
tion, and  one  which  conveys  a  definite  and  per- 
vading sentiment  or  emotion,  just  as  we  saw  that 
the  controlling  lines  of  structural  curves,  spirals, 
and  angles  require  to  be  in  relation,  and  to  be  re- 
echoed by  the  character  of  the  design  they  inclose, 
or  which  is  built  upon  them. 

The  same  law  holds  true  in  figure  composition. 
The  sense  of  repose  and  restfulness  necessary  to 
sitting  or  reclining  groups  depends  upon  the  gentle 
declivities  of  the  curves  and  their  gradual  descent 
to  the  horizontal. 

Draw  a  figure  sitting  rigid,  tense,  and  alert, 
and  you  destroy  the  sense  of  repose  at  once,  and 
you  are  obliged  also  to  resort  to  angles,  still  more 
emphatic  where  strong  action  is  to  be  expressed  ; 
while  to  express  continual  or  progressive  move- 
ment, a  choice  of  associated  lines  of  action  in  dif- 
ferent stages  of  progress  leading  up  to  the  cres- 
cendo of  the  final  one  (as  in  a  group  of  mowers) 
would  be  necessary  (see  illustrations,  p.  161).  We 
cannot,  then,  in  any  composition  have  too  definite 
a  conception.  We  must,  at  any  sacrifice  of  detail, 
bring  out  the  main  expression  and  meaning. 
Every  group  of  figures  must  be  in  the  strictest 
relation  to  each  other  and  to  the  central  interest 
or  expression  of  the  design.  You  cannot,  for  in- 
stance, in  a  procession  of  figures,  make  your  faces 
turn  all  sorts  of  ways  without  stopping  the  onward 
movement  which  is  essential  to  the  idea  of  a  pro- 

160 


INFORMAL    COMPOSITION  :    EXPRESSION  OF  REPOSE  AND  ACTION. 

M 


INFORMAL   COMPOSITION 

cession.  This  would  not  preclude  variety,  but  the 
general  tendency  must  be  in  one  direction.  Every 
line  in  a  composition  must  lead  up  to  the  central 
idea,  and  be  subordinated  or  contributory  to  it 
(see  illustration,  Nos.  i  and  2,  p.  163). 

The    same    with    masses :    you    cannot  put   a 
number  of  forms   together  without  some  sort  of 
relation,  either  of  general  character  and  contour 
or  some  uniting  line.   We  may  learn  this  principle 
from  nature  also.     Look  at  a  heap  of  broken  stones 
and  debris,  which  in  detail  may  contain  all  sorts  of 
varieties  of  form,  as  we  find  them  tumbled  down 
a  steep   place,   as   the  rocky  bed  of  a  mountain 
stream,  a  heap  of  boulders  upon  a  hillside,  or  the 
debris  from  a  quarry  or  mine;  in  each  case  the  law 
of  gravity  and   the  persistence   of  force  working 
together    arrange    the   diverse   forms    in   masses 
controlled  by  the  lines,  which  express  the  direc- 
tion  and  degree  of  descent,  and  the  pressure  of 
force.     The  same  thing  may  be  seen  on  any  hilly 
ground   after    heavy   rain ;  the    scattered  pebbles 
are   arranged    in   related    groups,  combined    and 
composed  by  the  flow  of  miniature  streams,  which 
channel  the  face  of  the  ground  and  form  hollows 
for  their  reception  (see  Nos.  3  and  4,  p.  163).    The 
force  of  the  tides  and  currents  upon  the  sea-shore 
illustrates  the  same  principle  and  affords  us  mag- 
nificent  lessons  in   composition,  not   only  in   the 
delicate  lines  taken  by  the  sculptured  sand,  but  in 
the  harmonious  grouping  of  masses  of  shingle  and 
shells,  weeds  and  drift,  arranged  by  the  movement 
of  the  waves. 

So  that  we  may  see  that  the  principles  of  har- 
monious composition  are  not  the  outcome  of  merely 

162 


SKETCHES  TO  SHOW  (13     HOW  THE 

OPA\OV£MENT  (K)A   PROCESSION     \S 

Too  c«fc£AT  ADivefcsrry  nw  THE 

OF  THE   HEADS 


(O)   MOW  THE  PROCESSIONAL.  MOVEMENT   iS 
ACCELERATED  BY   UM»TV  OF   DIRECTION 

TME     ARRANCEA^MT    OF  THE 


(3) 


(l)  AND   (2)   MOVEMENT   IN   A   PROCESSION, 

(3)  LINES    LEFT    BY   A    WATERCOURSE, 

(4)  LINES   GOVERNING   FALLEN   DEBRIS   FROM   A   QUARRY. 

163 


PRINCIPLES  OF  HARMONIOUS  COMPOSITION 
capricious  fancy  or  pedantic  rule,  but  are  illus- 
trated throughout  the  visible  world  by  the  laws  and 
forces  of  the  material  universe.  It  is  for  the  artist 
to  observe  and  apply  them  in  his  own  work  of 
re-creation. 


164 


CHAPTER    VII 

Of  the  Relief  of  Form— Three  Methods— Contrast— Light 
and  Shade,  and  Modelling — The  Use  of  Contrast  and  Planes  in 
Pattern  Designing— Decorative  Relief — Simple  Linear  Contrast 
—Relief  by  Linear  Shading — Different  Emphasis  in  relieving 
Form  by  Shading  Lines — Relief  by  means  of  Light  and  Shade 
alone  without  Outline — Photographic  Projection — Relief  by 
different  Planes  and  Contrasts  of  Concave  and  Convex  Surfaces 
in  Architectural  Mouldings— Modelled  Relief — Decorative  Use 
of  Light  and  Shade,  and  different  Planes  in  Modelling  and 
Carving — Egyptian  System  of  Relief  Sculpture — Greek  and 
Gothic  Architectural  Sculpture,  influenced  by  Structural  and 
Ornamental  Feeling — Sculptural  Tombs,  Medals,  Coins,  Gems 
— Florentine  Fifteenth-century  Reliefs — Desiderio  di  Settignano. 

WE  come  now  to  the  consideration  of  the 
various  means  and  methods  of  expressing 
relief  in  line  and  form. 

We  may  define  a  form  in  outline  and  give  it 
different  qualities  of  expression  by  altering  the 
quality  and  consistency  of  our  outline,  and  we  may 
obtain  very  different  kinds  of  decorative  effect  by 
the  use  of  lines  of  various  degrees  of  thickness  or 
thinness  ;  but  if  we  want  to  give  it  force  and  colour, 
and  to  distinguish  it  from  its  background  more  em- 
phatically, we  must  add  to  our  outline. 

There  are  three  principal  methods  or  systems  of 
giving  relief  by  adding  to  our  outline. 

One  is  the  method  of  giving  relief  to  form  by 
contrasts  of  tone,  colour,  or  tint. 

165 


THREE    METHODS   OF    EXPRESSING   RELIEF 

Another  by  means  of  the  expression  of  light  and 
shade  :  and  the  third  by  means  of  modelling  in 
relief. 

Now,  still  keeping  to  expression  by  means  of  line, 
the  three  arms  I  have  sketched  (p.  167)  illustrate  : 
(i)  the  form  in  outline  alone;  (2)  the  contrast 
method  ;  and  (3)  the  light  and  shade  method.  The 
three  pots  underneath  illustrate  the  same  three 
stages  in  a  simpler  manner. 

In  number  one  we  see  the  outline  defining  the 
form  pure  and  simple  :  in  number  two  the  form  is 
relieved  by  a  half-tone  formed  of  diagonal  lines, 
forming  a  plane  or  background  behind  it.  The  arm 
is  still  further  relieved  by  the  dark  drapery.  Num- 
ber three  shows  the  relief  carried  further  by  lines 
expressive  of  the  modelling  of  the  arm  and  the 
rounding  of  the  pot,  and  also  by  cast  shadows  from 
the  forms. 

The  system  of  expressing  relief  I  have  termed 
relief  by  contrast  includes  two  kinds  of  contrast  : 
there  are  the  contrasts  of  line  and  form,  and  there 
are  the  contrasts  of  planes  of  tone  or  tint  and  local 
colour.  We  may  consider  that  the  contrast  method 
covers  generally  all  forms  of  pattern  and  certain 
kinds  of  pictorial  design.  The  method  of  express- 
ing relief  by  means  of  line  covers  generally  all 
forms  of  design  in  black  and  white,  graphic  sketch- 
ing, pen-drawing,  and  work  with  the  point  of  all 
kinds. 

Taking  the  principle  of  contrast  as  applied  to 
pattern  design,  we  can,  even  within  the  limited 
range  of  black  and  white  and  half- tint  (as  expressed 
by  lines),  get  a  considerable  amount  of  decorative 
effect.  In  the  first  place  by  bringing  out  our  pat- 

166 


THE    RELIEF    OF    FORM  :    (l)    BY    OUTLINE,  (2)  BY    CONTRAST, 
(3)  BY    LIGHT   AND   SHADE. 


167 


OF  THE  USE  OF  CONTRAST  AND  PLANES 
tern,  previously  outlined,  upon  a  black  ground  (as 
in  Nos.  i  and  2,  p.  169),  increasing  the  richness  of 
effect,  and  getting  a  second  plane  by  treating  the 
lower  part  in  an  open  tint  of  line. 

Simple  contrasts  of  dark  upon  light  or  light  upon 
dark  are  effective,  and  sufficient  for  many  purposes, 
such  as  borders  (as  in  Nos.  2  and  3,  p.  169). 

When  a  lighter  kind  of  relief  and  effect  is  re- 
quired, the  recurring  forms  in  a  border  are  often 
sufficiently  emphasized  by  a  tint  of  open  lines  : 
movement  and  variety  being  given  by  making  them 
follow  the  minor  curves  of  the  successive  forms,  as 
in  this  instance  (No  4,  p.  169)  the  movement  of 
the  water  is  suggested  behind  the  fish. 

The  relation  of  the  plain  ground-work  to  the 
figure  of  the  pattern  is  also  an  important  point ; 
indeed  the  plain  parts  of  the  pattern,  or  the  inter- 
stices and  intervals  of  the  pattern,  are  as  essential 
to  the  pattern  as  the  figured  parts. 

In  designs  intended  for  various  processes  of 
manufacture,  such  as  printed  or  woven  textiles, 
wall-papers,  etc.,  where  blocks  or  rollers  are  used 
to  repeat  the  pattern,  the  extent  of  plain  in  pro- 
portion to  figured  parts  must  be  governed  in  some 
measure  by  the  practicable  size  of  the  repeat :  but 
within  certain  limits  great  variety  of  proportion  is 
possible. 

A  simple  but  essentially  decorative  principle  is 
to  preserve  a  certain  equality  between  the  figured 
masses  and  the  ground  masses.  The  leaf  patterns 
(Nos.  6  and  7,  p.  169)  consist  simply  of  the  repeti- 
tion and  reversal  of  a  single  element.  An  emphatic 
effect  is  obtained  by  bringing  the  leaves  out  black 
upon  a  white  ground  (as  in  No.  6),  while  a  flatter 

1 68 


RELIEF    OF    FORM    AND     LINE     IN    PATTERN     DESIGN    BY    MEANS 
OF    CONTRAST    AND    THE    USE    OF    PLANES. 


OF  THE  USE  OF  CONTRAST  AND  PLANES 
and  softer  effect  is  the  result  of  throwing  them 
upon  a  plane  of  half-tint  expressed  by  horizontal 
lines,  with  a  similar  effect  of  relief  to  that  which 
would  be  given  by  the  warp,  if  the  pattern  were 
woven. 

For  larger  surfaces,  greater  repose  and  dignity 
in  pattern  may  be  obtained  by  a  greater  proportion 
of  the  repeat  being  occupied  by  the  ground  (as  in 
No.  5,  p.  169). 

Indeed  we  may  consider  as  a  general  principle 
that  the  larger  the  interspaces  of  the  ground,  plane, 
or  field  of  the  pattern,  the  lighter  in  tint  they  should 
be,  or  the  necessary  flatness  is  apt  to  be  lost.  Re- 
lief in  pattern  design  may  be  said  to  be  adding 
interest  and  richness  without  losing  the  flatness 
and  repose  of  the  design  as  a  whole.  When  pattern 
and  ground  are  fairly  equally  balanced  in  quantity 
the  ground  may  be  rich  and  dark,  and  darkest  as 
the  interstices,  where  the  ground  is  shown,  become 
less.  The  figure  of  a  pattern  relieved  as  light  upon 
a  dark  plane,  as  a  rule,  requires  to  be  fuller  in  form 
than  dark-figuring  upon  a  light  ground. 

In  decorative  work  the  use  of  contrast  in  the 
relief  of  parts  of  a  design  is  often  useful  and  effec- 
tive, as,  for  instance,  the  dark  shading  or  treatment 
in  black  or  flat  tone  of  the  alternating  under  side 
of  a  turn-over  leaf-border. 

The  decorative  value  of  this  principle  is  recog- 
nized by  heraldic  designers  in  the  treatment  of  the 
mantling  of  the  helmet,  which  in  earlier  times  is 
treated  simplyas  a  hangingorflying  strip  of  drapery 
with  a  lining  of  a  different  colour,  by  which  it  is 
relieved  as  it  hangs  in  simple  spiral  folds.  This 
ornamental  element  became  developed  by  the  de- 

170 


DECORATIVE    RELIEF 

signers  of  the  fifteenth  and  sixteenth  centuries  into 
elaborate  scroll  designs  springing  from  the  circlet 
of  the  helmet  and  surrounding  the  shield  :  but  the 
principle  of  the  turned-up  lining  remained,  often 
variegated  and  enriched  with  heraldic  patterns 
(see  illustrations,  pp.  172,  I73).1 

The  principle,  too,  of  counterchange  in  heraldry 
answers  to  our  principle  of  relief  by  contrast,  and 
though  its  chief  charm  lies  in  its  ornamental  range 
of  form  and  colour  combinations,  itcan  be  expressed 
in  black  and  white,  and  it  remains  a  universal 
principle  throughout  decorative  art.  The  decor- 
ative effect  and  charm  of  the  relief  of  large  and 
bold  forms  upon  rich  and  delicate  diapers  is  also 
an  important  resource  of  the  designer.  The  monu- 
mental art  of  the  Middle  Ages  affords  multitudes 
of  examples  of  this  principle  in  ornamental  treat- 
ment. The  miniaturist  of  the  twelfth  and  thirteenth 
centuries  constantly  relieved  his  groups  of  figures 
upon  a  diapered  ground.  The  architectural  sculp- 
tor relieved  the  broad  masses  of  flowing  drapery 
and  the  bold  projection  of  his  effigies  and  recum- 
bent figures  by  delicately  chiselled  diapers  upon 
the  surface  of  the  wall  behind  them.  This  treat- 

1  The  increased  importance  given  to  the  mantling  in  later 
times  may  have  been  due  to  the  disappearance  of  the  housings 
of  the  knight's  horse  and  his  surcoat,  which  originally  displayed 
his  arms  and  colours.  The  mantling  of  later  times  displayed 
the  heraldic  colours  of  the  knight,  when,  being  clad  in  plate 
armour,  there  was  no  other  means  of  displaying  them  except 
on  the  shield.  Decoratively,  of  course,  the  mantling  is  of  great 
value  to  the  heraldic  designer,  enabling  him  to  form  much  more 
graceful  compositions,  to  combine  diverse  and  rigid  elements 
with  free  and  flowing  lines  and  masses,  and  to  fill  panels  with 
greater  richness  and  effect,  whether  carved  or  painted,  or  both. 

171 


ASSEV 

EARJLY   i^K  CENTURY 


DECORATIVE    RELIEF  :    COUNTERCHANGE,  TREATMENT    OF    MANT- 
LING,   FOURTEENTH   AND   SIXTEENTH   CENTURIES. 
172 


PLATE  . 

CHAPEL. 


AvvSA.W6M.Vj  ^wt, 

DECORATIVE   RELIEF  :  TREATMENT   OF   MANTLING. 
173 


USE   OF   DIAPERED   BACKGROUNDS 

ment  may   frequently    be  seen    in    the   recessed 

tombs  of  the  fourteenth  century. 

The  incisor  of  memorial  brasses,  again,  more 
especially  in  continental  examples,  shows  a  fond- 
ness for  the  same  principle.  The  long  vertical 
lines  of  drapery  of  ladies  and  ecclesiastics,  the 
broad  masses  of  the  heraldic  surcoat,  or  armour  of 
the  knights,  the  rich  and  heavy  furred  gowns  of 
the  burghers,  are  often  relieved  upon  beautiful 
diapered  or  arabesque  grounds,  generally  embody- 
ing some  heraldic  device,  motto,  or  emblem  of  the 
person  or  family  whose  tomb  it  ornaments.  Such 
decoration  is  strictly  linear,  yet  within  its  own 
limits,  and  perhaps  because  of  them,  we  find  in 
this  province  of  design  extremely  admirable  work, 
no  less  for  delineation  of  character  and  decorative 
treatment  than  for  ornamental  invention  controlled 
by  strict  economy  of  line. 

This  brings  us  to  the  consideration  of  our  second 
method  of  relief  by  means  of  line. 

Take  any  simple  allied  elements  to  form  a  re- 
peating pattern,  say  spiral  shells,  place  them  at 
certain  rhythmic  intervals,  and  we  can  unite  and 
at  the  same  time  give  them  relief  by  filling  in  the 
ground  by  a  series  of  waved  lines  to  suggest  the 
ribbed  sand.  Add  a  few  dots  to  soften  and  vary 
the  effect,  and  we  get  a  pattern  of  a  certain 
balance  and  consistency  (No.  i,  p.  177). 

With  the  more  varied  and  complex  floral  form, 
but  treated  in  a  very  abstract  way,  placing  the 
daisies  in  a  line,  horizontally,  and  reversing  the 
sprig  for  the  alternate  row,  we  have  another 
motive,  which  is  connected  and  steadied  as  well 
as  relieved  by  the  suggestion  of  grass  blades  in 

174 


RELIEF    UPON    A    DIAPERED    GROUND  :    BRASS    OF    MARTIN 
DE    VISCH,    BRUGES,    1452. 


RELIEF  OF  FORM  BY  LINEAR  SHADING 
groups  of  three  slightly  radiated  vertical  strokes 
(No.  2,  p.  177).  A  pattern  of  two  elements, 
again,  may  be  formed  in  a  still  more  simple  way 
by  linear  contrast,  as  in  No.  3,  where  the  pyra- 
midal trees  are  formed  by  a  continuous  serpentine 
stroke  of  the  pen  terminating  in  a  spiral  stem. 
The  diagonal  arrangement  of  the  trees  produces  a 
chequer,  the  intervals  of  which  can  be  varied  by 
the  contrasting  black  masses  of  the  birds. 

In  graphic  drawing,  lines  to  express  forms  in 
the  relief  of  light  and  shade  are  often  needed  to 
give  additional  force  even  where  no  great  degree 
of  realism  is  desired.  A  tint  formed  by  horizontal 
lines  is  sufficient  to  relieve  a  face  from  the  back- 
ground and  give  it  solidity,  while  local  colour  may 
be  given  to  the  hair,  and  at  the  same  time  serve 
to  relieve  the  leaves  of  a  wreath  encircling  the 
head  (see  illustration,  p.  178). 

The  rich  effect  of  clustered  apples  growing 
among  their  leaves  could  hardly  be  suggested 
without  the  use  of  lines  expressive  of  light  and 
shade,  the  interstices  of  the  deepest  shade  run- 
ning into  solid  black  (p.  178).  In  adding  lines  in 
this  kind  of  way  to  give  relief  or  extra  richness 
or  force,  the  draughtsman  is  really  designing  a 
system  of  lines  upon  his  outline  basis,  which  may 
have  quite  as  decorative  a  quality  as  the  outline 
itself.  At  the  same  time  nothing  is  more  char- 
acteristic of  the  artist  than  the  way  in  which  such 
lines  are  used,  and  of  course  the  choice  of  direction 
and  arrangement  of  such  lines  will  make  all  the 
difference  in  the  effect  of  the  drawing. 

Where  the  object  is  to  express  the  figure  in 
broad  masses  of  light  and  shade,  the  use  of  a 


RELIEF    IN    PATTERN    DESIGN  BY    MEANS    OF    SIMPLE    LINEAR 
CONTRASTS. 

177  N 


DIAGONAL   SHADING 

series  of  diagonal  lines  is  an  effective,  and  prob- 
ably   the   most   ready  and  rapid,    method    when 


RELIEF    BY    ADDING    SHADING    LINES    TO    OUTLINE. 

working  with  the  pen  (see  p.  179).  This  system 
of  expressing  the  broad  surfaces  of  shade  was 
much  used  by  the  Italian  masters  of  the  Renais- 

1/8 


RELIEF    OF    FORM    BY   DIAGONAL    SHADING. 
179 


EMPHASIS 

sance  in  their  rapid  pen  sketches  and  studies  of 
figures,  and  a  certain  breadth  and  style  is  given 
to  their  drawings  owing  in  part  to  the  simplicity 
of  this  linear  treatment. 

No  doubt  the  simpler  the  system  of  line 
adopted  in  giving  relief  to  figures  the  better,  if 
the  particular  expression  aimed  at  is  accomplished, 
and,  as  a  general  rule,  we  should  endeavour  to 
get  the  necessary  force  and  depth  without  the  use 
of  cross-line,  or  many  different  directions  of  line 
in  shading  a  figure :  but,  given  any  power  of 
draughtsmanship,  the  individuality  of  the  artist  is 
bound  to  come  in,  and  it  is  not  likely,  nor  is  it  to 
be  desired,  that  any  two  artists  in  line  should  give 
exactly  the  same  account  of  natural  fact,  or  repro- 
duce the  images  in  their  minds  in  the  same  forms, 
any  more  than  we  should  expect  two  writers  to 
express  their  ideas  in  the  same  terms. 

The  kind  and  degree  of  emphasis  upon  different 
parts,  the  selection  of  moment  or  fact,  would  all 
naturally  make  considerable  differences  in  the 
treatment.  The  three  sketches  of  the  skirt 
dancer  are  given  as  instances  of  the  different 
effects  and  expression  to  be  obtained  in  rendering 
the  same  subject  (p.  i&i). 

In  A  the  broad  relief  of  the  white  dress  against 
the  tones  of  the  floor  and  background,  and  the 
darker  note  of  the  hair,  are  the  facts  chiefly  dwelt 
upon.  In  B  the  form  of  the  figure  is  brought  out 
in  broad  light  and  shade  and  cast  shadow,  and  the 
dress  relieved  by  radiating  folds.  In  c  quicker 
movement  is  given,  the  lines  of  the  successive 
wave-shaped  folds  radiating  spirally  from  the 
shoulders  being  the  chief  means  of  conveying  this, 

1 80 


DIFFERENT    METHOD    AND    DIFFERENT   EMPHASIS    IN    RELIEVING 
FORM    BY    SHADING    LINES. 


EMPHASIS 

while  the  head  and  arms  are  thrown  into  strong 
relief  against  a  dark  background,  the  cast  shadow 
being  of  a  lighter  tone. 

The  direction  of  line  used  in  relieving  forms, 
and  expressing  modelling  and  details,  must  depend 
much  upon  individual  taste  and  feeling  as  well  as 
knowledge  of  form.  The  element  of  beauty  of 
design  also  comes  in,  and  the  question  between 
this  and  force  or  literalness — the  difference  be- 
tween a  study  or  direct  transcript  from  nature, 
and  a  design  with  a  purely  ornamental  aim,  or  a 
composition  directed  mainly  to  the  expression  of 
a  particular  idea  or  emotion. 

Such  considerations  will  ultimately  determine 
the  choice  and  use  of  line,  the  degree  of  relief  and 
emphasis,  for  these  and  the  direction  of  the  line 
itself  are  the  syllables  and  the  words  which  will 
convey  the  purport  of  the  work  lo  the  mind  of  the 
beholder. 

Study  of  the  masters  of  line — Du'rer,  Titian, 
Mantegna,  Holbein  —  will  inform  us  as  to  its 
capacities  and  limitations.  The  limitations,  too, 
of  method  and  material  will  be  a  powerful  factor 
in  the  determination  of  style  in  the  use  of  line  and 
in  the  economy  of  its  use. 

The  bold  firm  line  suitable  to  the  facsimile 
woodcut,  the  broad  and  simple  treatment  of  line 
with  solid  black  useful  in  the  plank-cut  line  block 
to  be  used  with  colour  blocks,  the  comparatively 
free  and  unconditioned  pen-drawing  for  the  sur- 
face-printed process  block — all  these  will  finally 
give  a  certain  character  to  our  work  beyond  our 
own  idiosyncrasies  in  the  use  of  the  pen  or  the 
brush. 

182 


ALBERT  DURER'S  PRINCIPLE  IN  THE  TREATMENT  OF  DRAPERY: 
FROM   THE   WOODCUT    IN    THE    "  LIFE    OF  THE  VIRGIN  " 

SERIES. 


183 


EMPHASIS 

Useful  things  may  be  learned  by  the  way,  such 
as  Albert  Dtirer's  principle  of  giving  substance  to 
his  figures  and  details,  more  especially  seen  in  his 
treatment  of  drapery,  when  the  lines  run  into  solid 
black  and  express  the  deeper  folds  and  give  em- 
phasis and  solidity  to  the  figure  (p.  183).  The 
reproductions  here  given  of  sketches  of  drapery 


ALBERT    DURER  :    PEN-DRAWING. 


the 


by   Filippino   Lippi   and  Raphael  also  shov 
same  principle. 

A  figure  or  object  of  any  kind,  seen  in  full  light 
and  shade,  is  relieved  at  any  of  its  edges  either  as 
dark  against  light,  or  as  light  against  dark,  and  we 
recognize  it  as  a  solid  form  in  this  way;  the  bound- 
aries of  natural  light  and  shade  defining  it,  and 
projecting  it  from  the  background  upon  the  vision. 
There  may  be  infinite  modulations,  of  course,  be- 

184 


FILIPPINO    LIPPi:    STUDY*  OF  DRAPERY. 

185 


EMPHASIS 

tween  the  light  part,  the  half-tones,  and  the  darkest 
parts  ;  but  this  broad  principle  governs  all  work 
representing  light  and  shade. 


RAPHAEL  I  STUDIES  OF  DRAPERY. 

It  is,  in  fact,  the  principle  of  the  relief  of  form 
represented  upon  a  plane  surface. 

1 86 


RELIEF   BY   LIGHT   AND   SHADE  ALONE 

If  the  draughtsman's  object  be  to  represent  the 
appearance  of  a  figure  or  any  object  in  full  natural 
light  and  shade  with  the  pen  or  other  point,  he 
could  do  so  without  using  outline  at  all,  but  by 
simply  observing  this  principle  and  defining  the 
boundaries  of  light  on  dark  or  half-tone  in  their 
proper  masses  and  relations.  The  pen  sketch  of 
the  man  with  the  hoe  (p.  188)  is  intended  to  illus- 
trate this  method. 

There  is  also  the  method  of  representing  form 
in  relief  by  means  of  working  with  white  line  only 
upon  a  dark  ground,  the  modelling  and  planes  ol 
surface  being  entirely  expressed  in  this  way  (as  in 
A,  p.  189).  This  may  be  termed  drawing  by  means 
of  light,  and  may  be  contrasted  with  the  opposite 
method  of  working  by  means  of  black  line  only 
on  a  light  ground,  or  drawing  by  means  of  shade 
(as  in  B,  p.  189). 

Yet  another  method,  and  one  in  which  the  effect 
of  relief  can  be  obtained  more  readily  and  rapidly, 
perhaps,  is  by  working  on  a  half-toned  paper,  draw- 
ing in  the  form  with  pencil,  chalk,  or  brush,  block- 
ing in  the  darker  shadows  and  heightening  the 
highest  lights  with  touches  of  white.  These  white 
touches,  however,  should  be  strictly  limited  to  the 
highest  lights.  This  method  is  represented  by 
the  half-tone  blocks  used  in  this  book,  those  which 
were  taken  from  drawings  made  on  brown  paper 
and  -touched  with  white. 

The  definition  of  form  by  means  of  light  is  strictly 
the  principle  of  the  photograph,  whichcomprehends 
and  illustrates  its  complementary  of  relief  by  means 
of  shade,  and  I  think  it  is  due  to  the  influence  of 
the  photograph  that  modern  black-and-white  artists 


RELIEF    BY    MEANS    OF    LIGHT    AND    SHADE    ALONE,    IN    PEN- 
DRAWING    WITHOUT    OUTLINE. 


I  88 


RELIEF  OF  FORM  :   (A)  BY  WHITE    LINE    ONLY  ON  DARK  GROUND, 
AND   (B)    BY  BLACK    LINE    ONLY    ON    LIGHT    GROUND. 
I89 


THE    PRINCIPLE   OF   THE    PHOTOGRAPH 
have  so  often  worked  on  these  principles.    The 
drawings  of  Frederick  Walker  and  Charles  Keene 
may  be  referred  to  as  examples.    I  shall,  however, 
hope  to  return  to  this  branch  of  the  subject  later. 

So  far  we  have  been  considering  the  relief  of 
form  by  means  of  line.  We  now  come  to  what 
may  be  termed  the  relief  of  form  by  actual  form 
and  plane,  or  modelling  in  actual  light  and  shade, 
as  in  architecture  and  sculptors'  and  carvers' work. 
Then  relief  is  gained  by  the  contrast  of  actually 
different  planes,  forms,  surfaces,  and  textures.  The 
simplest  illustrations  of  the  principles  of  modelled 
relief  are  to  be  found  in  architectural  mouldings, 
by  means  of  which  buildings  are  relieved  and  en- 
riched, and  important  structural  or  functional  parts 
are  emphasized,  as  in  cornices  and  ribs  of  vaults, 
arches,  and  openings. 

Place  a  concave  moulding  side  by  side  with  a 
convex  one  either  horizontally  or  vertically,  and  a 
certain  pleasant  effect  of  contrasting  light  and  shade 
is  the  result,  reminding  one  of  the  recurring  con- 
cave and  convex  of  the  rolling  waves  of  the  sea 
(A,  p.  191). 

A  series  of  flat  planes  of  different  widths  and  at 
different  levels  also  produces  a  pleasant  kind  of 
relief  useful  in  a  picture  frame  or  the  jamb  of  a 
door  (B). 

All  architectural  mouldings  might  be  said  to  be 
modifications  or  combinations  of  the  principles 
illustrated  by  these  two. 

Very  different  feeling  may  be  expressed  in 
mouldings,  and  if  we  compare  the  two  types,  the 
classical  and  the  Gothic,  the  comparatively  broad 
and  simple  effect  of  the  former  (c,  D,  E,  F,  G)  con- 

190 


(GR£EK  &  ROMAN)  (QOTHICJ 

RELIEF    IN    ARCHITECTURAL     MOULDINGS. 


RELIEF   IN   ARCHITECTURAL   MOULDINGS 
trasts  with  the  richness  and  variety  and  the  stronger 
effect  of  light  and  shade,  produced  by  deep  under- 
cutting, in  the  latter  (H,  i,  j,  K). 

The  Romans,  however,  produced  rich  and  highly 
ornate  effects  in  the  use  of  these  types  of  mouldings, 
as  they  reappeared  in  the  Corinthian  order,  the 
ovolo  cut  into  the  egg  and  dart,  with  the  Astralagus 
beneath,  the  Cyma  recta  above  the  brackets  of  the 
cornice  casting  a  bold  shadow,  and  both  in  the 
cornice  and  the  hollow  beneath  the  dentils  enriched 
with  carving,  as  seen  in  the  splendid  fragment  of 
the  Forum  of  Nerva. 

When  we  pass  to  the  more  complex  problems 
of  figure  modelling  and  sculpture,  it  is  but  carrying 
on  and  developing  the  same  principle  of  the  con- 
trast of  planes,  of  the  relief  of  plane  upon  plane, 
of  forms  upon  one  plane,  to  forms  upon  forms  in 
many  planes.  From  the  contrast  of  bead  and 
hollow  we  come  to  consider  the  contrast  between 
the  rounded  limb  and  the  sinuous  folds  of  drapery  ; 
from  the  rhythm  of  the  acanthus  scroll  we  turn  to 
the  less  obvious  but  none  the  less  existing  rhythm 
of  the  sculptural  frieze. 

Line,  we  may  say,  controls  the  modeller's  and 
sculptor's  composition,  but  form  and  its  treatment 
in  light  and  shade  give  him  his  means  of  ornament. 
The  delicate  contours  of  faces  and  limbs  contrasted 
with  the  spiral  and  radiating  folds  of  drapery,  or 
rich  clusters  of  leaves  and  fruits,  the  forms  of 
animals  and  the  wings  of  birds— these  are  his  de- 
corative resources. 

The  early  stages  of  sculpture  in  relief  may  be 
seen  in  the  monumental  work  of  ancient  Egypt. 

Simple  incised  work  appears  to  have  been  the 

TQ2 


ROMAN  TREATMENT  OF  CORINTHIAN  ORDER,  FORUM  OF 
NERVA,  ROME. 

193  o 


EGYPTIAN   RELIEFS 

first  stage,  and  the  forms  -  afterwards  slightly 
modelled  or  rounded  at  the  edges  into  the  hollow 
of  the  sunk  outline. 

Large  figures  and  tables  of  hieroglyphic  inscrip- 
tion were  thus  cut  upon  vast  mural  surfaces,  and 
carried  across  the  joints  of  the  masonry,  without 
disturbing  the  flatness  and  repose  of  the  wall  sur- 
face (p.  195).  The  Egyptians,  indeed,  seem  to 
have  treated  their  walls  more  as  if  they  were  books 
for  record  and  statement,  symbol  and  hieroglyphic. 

Messrs.  Perrot  and  Chipiez,  in  their  "  History 
of  Ancient  Art  in  Egypt,"  speak  of  three  processes 
in  the  treatment  of  Egyptian  reliefs  (vol.  ii.,  p. 
284)  : 

1.  That  followed  by  the  Greeks,  in  which  the 
figures  are  left  standing  out  from  a  smooth  bed, 
sometimes    slightly    hollowed   near    the  contours 
(see  illustration,  p.  196). 

2.  Where  the  figures  are  modelled  in  relief  in 
a  sunk  hollow,   from  an  inch  to  one  and  a  half 
inch  deep. 

3.  Where  the  surface  of  the  figures  and  the  bed 
or  field  of  relief  are  kept  on  one  level  (see  illustra- 
tion, p.  1 96),  the  contours  indicated  by  hollow  lines 
cut  into  the  stone  ;  very  little  modelling,  little  more 
than  silhouette,  in  which  the  outline  is  shown  by 
a  hollow  instead  of  by  the  stroke  of  a  pencil  or 
brush. 

One  would  be  inclined  to  reverse  the  order  of 
these  three  processes,  on  the  supposition  that  No. 
3  was  the  earliest  process,  and  that  it  arose,  as  I 
have  conjectured,  from  the  practice  of  representing 
forms  by  incised  lines  only. 

There  is  certainly  a  strong  family  likeness  as  to 
194 


EGYPTIAN    SYSTEM    OF   SCULPTURED    RELIEF:    THEBES. 
195 


GREEK  RELIEF 
ELEU5IS. 


196 


GOTHIC  SCULPTURE 

method  between  the  Egyptian  reliefs  and  the  As- 
syrian, the  Persian,  and  the  archaic  Greek  ;  and 
there  is  a  far  greater  difference  in  treatment  be- 
tween archaic  Greek  relief  sculpture  and  the  work 
of  the  Phidian  period  than  between  the  archaic 
work  of  the  three  races  named. 

The  strictly  mural  and  decorative  conditions 
which  governed  ancient  sculpture  no  doubt  gave  to 
Greek  sculpture  in  its  perfection  a  certain  dignity, 
simplicity,  and  restraint,  and  also  accounted  in  a 
great  measure  for  that  rhythmic  control  of  invisible 
structural  and  ornamental  line  which  asserts  itself 
in  such  works  as  the  Pan-Athenaic  frieze.  It  was 
strictly  slab  sculpture,  and  became  part  of  the 
surface  of  the  wall. 

The  structural  andornamental  feeling alsoasserts 
itself  strongly  in  Gothic  sculpture,  owing  to  its  close 
association  with  architecture,  as,  when  it  was  not 
an  intregal  part  of  the  structure,  it  was  always  an 
essential  part  of  the  expression  of  the  building, 
and  it  was  this  which  controlled  its  treatment  de- 
coratively,  in  its  scale  and  its  system  and  degree  of 
relief. 

In  the  porches  of  the  Gallo-Roman  churches  of 
France  of  the  twelfth  century,  the  figures  occupy- 
ing the  place  of  shafts  became  columnar  in  treat- 
ment, the  sinuous  formalized  draperies  wrapped 
around  the  elongated  figures,  or  falling  in  vertical 
folds,  as  in  the  figures  in  the  western  door  of 
Chartres  Cathedral  (p  199).  The  lines  of  the  de- 
sign of  the  sculptured  tympanum  were  strictly  re- 
lated to  the  space,  and  the  degree  and  treatment 
of  the  relief  clearly  felt  in  regard  to  the  architec- 
tural effect  (p.  201). 

'97 


ARCHITECTURAL   INFLUENCE 

In  the  sculptured  tombs  of  the  Middle  Ages, 
with  their  recumbent  figures  and  heraldic  enrich- 
ments, again,  we  see  this  architectonic  sense  influ- 
encing the  treatment  of  form  and  relief,  as  these 
monuments  were  strictly  architectural  decorations, 
often  incorporating  its  forms  and  details,  and  often 
built  into  the  structure  of  the  church  or  cathedral 
itself,  as  in  the  case  of  the  recessed  and  canopied 
tombs  of  the  thirteenth  and  fourteenth  centuries. 

As  sculptures  became  detached  from  the  building 
and  wall,  and  appeared  in  full  relief  in  the  round, 
though  still,  as  it  were,  carrying  a  reminiscence  of 
their  origin  with  them  in  the  shape  of  the  moulded 
pedestal,  architectural  control  became  less  and  less 
felt,  statues  in  consequence  being  less  and  less 
related  to  their  surroundings.  The  individual  feel- 
ing of  the  sculptor  or  the  traditions  of  his  school 
and  training  alone  influenced  his  treatment,  until 
we  get  the  incidental  and  dramatic  or  sentimental 
isolated  figure  or  group  of  modern  days. 

It  is  noteworthy,  however,  that  even  in  the 
smaller  works  of  the  modeller,  carver,  or  sculptor 
of  the  Middle  Ages  or  the  early  Renaissance,  a 
sense  of  decorative  fitness  and  structural  sense  is 
always  present.  We  see  it  in  the  carved  ornaments 
of  seats  and  furniture,  in  the  design  and  treatment 
of  coins  and  seals  and  gems  and  medals.  These 
latter  from  the  time  of  the  ancient  Greeks  afford 
beautiful  examples  of  the  decorative  treatment  of 
relief  in  strict  relation  to  the  object  and  purpose. 
The  skill  and  taste  of  the  Greeks  seemed  to  have 
been  largely  inherited  by  the  artists  of  the  earlier 
Italian  Renaissance,  such  as  Pisano,  whose  famous 
medal  of  the  Malatesta  of  Rimini  affords  a  splendid 

198 


CHARTRP:S  CATHEDRAL:  CARVING  ON  THE  WEST  FRONT 
199 


MEDALS   AND   COINS 

instance  not  only  of  the  treatment  of  the  portrait 
and  subject  on  the  reverse  perfectly  adapted  to  its 
method  and  purpose,  but  also  of  the  artistic  use  of 
lettering  as  a  decorative  feature  (see  p.  203). 

The  treatment  and  relief  of  figures  and  heads 
upon  the  plane  surfaces  of  metals  and  coins,  the 
composition  controlled  by  the  circular  form,  have 
always  been  a  fine  test  of  both  modelling  and 
decorative  skill  and  taste.  Breadth  is  given  by  a 
flatness  in  the  treatment  of  successive  planes  of 
low  relief,  which  rise  to  their  highest  projection 
from  the  ground,  in  the  case  of  a  head  in  profile, 
about  its  centre.  The  delicate  perception  of  the 
relation  of  the  planes  of  surface  is  important,  as 
well  as  the  decorative  effect  to  be  obtained  by 
arrangement  of  the  light  and  shade  masses  and 
the  contrast  of  textures,  such  as  hair  and  the 
folds  of  drapery,  to  the  smooth  contours  of 
faces  and  figures,  and  the  rectangular  forms  of 
lettering. 

In  gems  we  see  the  use  made  of  the  concave 
ground,  which  gives  an  effective  relief  to  the 
figure  design  in  convex  upon  it.  Bolder  projec- 
tion of  prominent  parts  are  here  necessary  in  con- 
trast to  the  retiring  planes,  the  work  being  on  so 
small  a  scale,  and  also  in  view  of  its  seal-like  char- 
acter ;  for,  of  course,  it  is  the  method  of  producing 
form  by  incision,  and  modelling  by  cutting  and 
hollowing  out,  that  gives  the  peculiar  character  to 
gems  and  seals  ;  and  it  is  in  forming  human  figures 
that  the  building  up  of  the  form  by  a  series  of 
ovals,  spoken  of  in  a  previous  chapter,  becomes 
really  of  practical  value  :  the  method  of  hollowing 
the  stone  or  metal  in  cutting  the  gem  or  making  a 

200 


DESIDERIO   DI   SETTIGNANO 

die  and  the  character  of  the  tool  leading  naturally 

in  that  direction. 

Perhaps  the  most  delicate  and  beautiful  kind  of 
sculptured  or  modelled  relief  is  to  be  found  in  the 
work  of  the  Florentine  school  of  the  fifteenth 
century,  more  especially  that  of  Donatello  and 
Desiderio  di  Settignano,  who  seem  indeed  to  have 
caught  the  feeling  and  spirit  of  the  best  Greek 
period,  with  fresh  inspiration  and  suggestion  from 
nature  and  the  life  around  them,  as  well  as  an 
added  charm  of  grace  and  sweetness. 

It  is  difficult  to  imagine  that  marble  carving  in 
low  relief  can  be  carried  to  greater  perfection  than 
it  is  in  the  well-known  small  relief  by  Desiderio 
di  Settignano  of  the  "  Madonna  and  Child,"  now 
in  the  Italian  Court  of  the  South  Kensington 
Museum.  The  delicate  yet  firmly  chiselled  faces 
and  hands,  the  smooth  surfaces  of  the  flesh,  and 
the  folds  of  drapery,  emerging  from,  or  sinking 
into,  the  varied  planes  of  the  ground,  for  refine- 
ment of  feeling  and  treatment  seem  almost  akin 
to  the  art  of  the  painter  in  the  tenderness  of  their 
expression. 


202 


MEDALS  OF  THE  LORDS  OF  MANTUA,  CESENA,  AND  FERRARA, 
BY  VITTORE  PISANO  OF  VERONA  (MIDDLE  OF  THE  FIF- 
TEENTH CENTURY). 


CHAPTER   VIII 

Of  the  Expression  of  Relief  in  Line-drawing — Graphic  Aim 
and  Ornamental  Aim — Superficial  Appearance  and  Constructive 
Reality — Accidents  and  Essentials— Representation  and  Sug- 
gestion of  Natural  Form  in  Design — The  Outward  Vision  and 
the  Inner  Vision. 

I  HAVE  already  said  that  when  we  add  lines 
or  tints  of  shadow,  local  colour  or  surface,  to 
an  outline  drawing,  we  are  seeking  to  express 
form  in  a  more  complete  way  than  can  be  done  in 
outline  alone.  These  added  lines  or  tints  give 
what  we  call  relief.  That  is  their  purpose  and 
function,  whether  by  that  added  relief  we  wish  to 
produce  an  ornamental  effector  simply  to  approach 
nearer  to  the  full  relief  of  nature,  for  of  course  the 
degrees  of  relief  are  many. 

What  may  be  called  the  natural  principle  of 
relief — that  system  of  light  and  shade  by  which  a 
figure  or  any  solid  object  is  perceived  as  such  by 
the  eye — consists  in  each  part  of  the  form  being 
thrown  into  more  or  less  contrast  by  appearing  as 
dark  on  light  upon  its  background,  more  especially 
at  its  edges.  A  figure  wholly  dark,  say  in  black 
drapery,  appearing  against  a  light  ground,  might 
be  supposed  to  be  flat  if  no  cast  shadow  was 
seen  ;  the  same  with  the  reverse — a  light  figure 
upon  a  dark  ground— except  that  in  this  latter 

204 


RELIEF   IN   LINE-DRAWING 

case,  unless  the  light  was  very  level  and  flat,  a 
certain  concentration  of  light  upon  the  highest 
parts,  or  indicating  a  modulation  of  shadow  in 
interstices,  might  betray  its  solidity  (see  p.  206). 

But  if  we  place  a  figure  so  that  the  light  falls 
from  one  side,  we  perceive  that  it  at  once  stands 
out  in  bold  relief  in  broad-  planes  of  light  and 
shade,  further  emphasized  by  cast  shadows  (p. 
207). 

It  would  be  possible  to  represent  or  to  express 
a  figure  or  object  so  lighted  by  means  of  laying  in 
the  modulations  and  planes  of  shadow  only,  or  by 
means  of  adding  the  light  only  on  a  toned  ground. 
In  sketching  in  black  and  white,  it  is  a  good  plan 
to  accustom  oneself  to  complete  as  one  goes  along, 
as  far  as  may  be,  putting  in  outline  and  shadow 
together  ;  but  this  needs  a  power  of  direct  draw- 
ing and  a  correctness  of  eye  only  to  be  gained  by 
continual  practice.  A  slight  preliminary  basis  of 
light  lines  to  indicate  the  position  and  proportions, 
and  yet  not  strong  enough  to  need  rubbing  out, 
is  also  a  good  method  for  those  who  do  not  feel 
certain  enough  for  the  absolutely  direct  method  of 
drawing. 

Now  in  drawing,  as  I  think  I  have  pointed  out 
before,  no  less  than  in  all  art,  there  are  two  main 
governing  principles  of  working  which   may  be 
distinguished. 
/    I.   The  graphic  aim. 

II.   The  ornamental  or  decorative  aim. 

The  graphic  aim — the  endeavour  to  represent  a 
form  exactly  as  it  appears — a  power  always  valu- 
able to  acquire  whatever  may  be  our  ultimate 
purpose,  leaves  the  draughtsman  great  freedom 

205 


THE   TWO   PRINCIPLES   OF  CONTRAST   IN    BLACK   AND   WHITE. 

2O6 


TREATMENT  OF   THE    SAME    FIGURE 
207 


IN    LIGHT  AND    SHADE. 


THE   GRAPHIC   AIM 

in  the  choice  and  use  of  line,  or  other  means  of 

obtaining  relief,  local  tint,  and  tone. 

In  line- work  the  broad  relief  of  the  flat  tones  of 
shadow  may  be  expressed  in  lines   approaching" ' 
the  straight,  diagonally  sloping  from  right  to  left, 
or  from  left  to  right,  as  seems  most  natural  to  the 
action  of  the  hand. 

The  quality  of  our  lines  will  depend  upon  the 
quality  we  are  seeking  to  express.  We  shall  be 
led  to  vary  them  in  seeking  to  express  other 
characteristics,  such  as  textures  and  surfaces. 

In  drawing  fur  or  feathers,  for  instance,  we 
should  naturally  vary  the  quality  and  direction  of 
line,  using  broken  lines  and  clots  for  the  former, 
and  flowing  smooth  fine  lines  for  the  latter,  while 
extra  force  and  relief  would  be  gained  by  throwing 
them  up  upon  solid  black  grounds.  Solid  black, 
also,  to  represent  local  colour,  or  material  such  as 
velvet,  is  often  valuable  as  a  contrast  in  black  and 
white  line-drawing,  giving  a  richness  of  effect  not  to 
be  obtained  in  any  other  way  (see  No.  2,  p.  213). 
Its  value  was  appreciated  by  the  early  German 
and  Italian  book-illustrators,  and  in  our  own  time 
has  been  used  almost  to  excess  by  some  of  our 
younger  designers,  who  have  been  largely  in- 
fluenced by  Hokusai  and  other  Japanese  artists, 
who  are  always  skilful  in  the  use  of  solid  blacks. 

In  line-drawing  a  very  useful  principle  to  ob- 
serve, to  give  solidity  to  figures  and  objects,  is  to 
let  one's  lines — say  of  drapery  or  shadow — run 
into  solid  blacks  in  the  deepest  interstices  of  the 
forms,  as  when  folds  of  drapery  are  wrapped 
about  a  figure,  or  in  the  deeper  folds  themselves 
(No.  i,  p.  213). 

208 


EXPRESSION  OF  FORM  BY  LIGHT  AND  SHADE  :  (l)  LIGHT  AND 
SHADE  WITHOUT  OUTLINE;  (2)  LIGHT  AND  SHADE  ENFORCED 
BY  OUTLINE. 

209  P 


THE   ORNAMENTAL   AIM 

I  have  spoken  of  the  graphic  and  the  orna- 
mental aims  as  distinct,  and  so  they  may  for 
practical  purposes  be  regarded  ;  although  in  some 
cases  it  is  possible  to  combine  a  considerable 
amount  of  graphic  force  with  decorative  effect, 
and  even  in  purely  graphic  art  there  should 
always  be  the  controlling  influence  of  the  sense 
of  composition  which  must  be  felt  throughout  all 
forms  of  art. 

For  the  simplest  ornamental  function,  however, 
very  little  graphic  drawing  is  needed,  over  arid 
above  the  very  essential  power  of  definition  by 
pure  outline,  and  feeling  for  silhouette ;  but  a 
sense  for  the  relief  of  masses  upon  a  ground  or 
field,  and  of  the  proportions  and  relations  of  lines 
and  masses  or  distribution  of  quantities,  is  essential. 
Now  an  ornamental  effect  may  be  produced  by 
the  simple  repetition  of  some  form  defined  in 
outline  arranged  so  as  to  fall  into  a  rhythmic 
series  of  lines. 

A  series  of  birds  upon  a  plan  of  this  kind,  for 
instance,  would  form  a  frieze  on  simple  bordering 
in  abstract  line  alone,  and  might  be  quite  sufficient 
for  some  purposes.  The  same  thing  would  be 
capable  of  more  elaborate  treatment  and  different 
effect  by  relieving  the  birds  upon  a  darker  ground, 
by  defining  the  details  of  their  forms  more,  or  by 
alternating  them  in  black  or  white,  or  by  adopt- 
ing the  simple  principle  of  counterchange  (see 

P-  2I5)- 

Flowers    or   figures  would  be   capable  of  the 

same  simple  and  abstract  treatment;  and  almost 
any  form  in  nature,  reduced  to  its  simplest  ele- 
ments of  recurring  line  and  mass,  and  rhythmic- 

210 


LINEAR   EXPRESSION    OF    FEATURES,     FEATHERS    AND    FUR 

NOTES    FROM    NATURE. 

21  I 


THE   ORNAMENTAL  AIM 

ally  disposed,   would  give  us  distinct  decorative 

motives. 

It  is  quite  open  to  the  designer  to  select  his 
lines  and  forms  straight  from  nature,  and,  bearing 
in  mind  the  necessity  for  selection  of  the  best 
ornamental  elements,  for  a  certain  simplification, 
and  the  rhythmical  treatment  before  mentioned,  it 
is  good  to  do  so,  as  the  work  is  more  likely  to 
have  a  certain  freshness  than  if  some  of  the  well- 
known  historic  forms  of  ornament  are  used  again. 
We  may,  however,  learn  much  from  the  orna- 
mental use  of  these  forms,  and  use  similar  forms 
as  the  boundaries  of  the  shape  of  our  pattern  units 
and  masses. 

It  is  good  practice  to  take  a  typical  shape  such 
as  the  Persian  radiating  flower  or  pine-apple,  and 
use  it  as  the  plan  for  quite  a  different  structure  in 
detail,  taking  some  familiar  English  flower  as  our 
motive.  The  same  with  the  Indian  and  Persian 
palmette  type.  It  is  also  desirable,  as  before 
pointed  out,  to  draw  sprays  within  formal  bound- 
aries for  ornamental  use.  By  such  methods  we 
may  not  only  learn  to  appreciate  the  ornamental 
value  of  such  forms,  but  by  such  adaptation  and 
re-combination  produce  new  varieties  of  ornament 
(see  p.  2  1 7). 

We  may  perceive  how  J'stinct  are  the  two  aims 
as  between  simple  grapiJc  drawing,  or  delinea- 
tion and  what  we  call  design,  or  conscious  ar- 
rangements of  line  or  form.  While  planes  of  relief, 
varied  form  and  surface,  values  of  light  and  shade, 
and  accidental  characteristics  are  rather  the  ob- 
ject with  the  graphic  draughtsman,  typical  form 
and  structure,  and  recurring  line  and  mass,  are 

212 


(2) 


SKETCHES    TO    ILLUSTRATE   (l)    THE    GRAPHIC   AND    (2)    THE 

DECORATIVE    TREATMENT    OF    DRAPED   FIGURES. 

2T3 


SELECTION 

sought  for  by  the  ornamentist.     Both   series  of 

facts,  or  qualities,  or  characteristics,  are  in  nature. 

Judicious  selection,  however,  is  the  test  of 
artistic  treatment  ;  selection,  that  is,  with  a  view 
to  the  aim  and  scope  of  the  work.  The  truth  of 
superficial  appearance  or  accidental  aspect  is  one 
sort  of  truth  :  the  truth  of  the  actual  constructive 
characteristics — be  they  of  figure,  flower,  or  land- 
scape— is  another.  Both  belong  to  the  thing  we 
see — to  the  object  we  are  drawing  ;  but  we  shall 
dwell  upon  one  truth  or  set  of  truths  rather  than 
the  other,  in  accordance  with  our  particular  artistic 
aim,  though,  whatever  this  may  be,  and  in  what- 
ever direction  it  may  lead  us,  we  shall  find  that 
selection  of  some  sort  will  be  necessary. 

In  making  studies,  however  pure  and  simple, 
the  object  of  which  is  to  discover  facts  and  to  learn 
mastery  of  form,  our  aim  should  be  to  get  as  much 
truth  as  we  can,  truth  of  structure  as  well  as  of 
aspect.  But  these  (as  far  as  we  can  make  them) 
exhaustive  studies  should  be  accompanied  or 
followed  by  analytical  studies  made  from  different 
points  of  view  and  for  different  purposes. 

Studies,  for  instance,  made  with  a  view  to  ar- 
rangements of  line  only — to  get  the  characteristic 
and  beautiful  lines  of  a  figure,  a  momentary  atti- 
tude, the  lines  of  a  flower,  or  a  landscape:  studies 
with  a  view,  solely,  to  the  understanding  of  struc- 
ture and  form,  or  again,  with  the  object  of  seizing 
the  broad  relations  of  light  and  shade,  or  tone  and 
colour — all  are  necessary  to  a  complete  artistic 
education  of  the  eye. 

If  we  are  drawn  as  students  rather  towards  the 
picturesque  and  graphic  side  of  art,  we  shall  prob- 

214 


DECORATIVE   TREATMENT    OF    BIRDS. 


ACCIDENTS   AND   ESSENTIALS 
ably  look  for  accidents  of  line  and  form  more  than 
what  I  should  call  the  essentials,  or  typical  line 
and   form,  which  are   the  most  valuable   to  the 
decorative  designer. 

In  both  directions  some  compact  or  compro- 
mise with  nature  is  necessary  in  any  really  artistic 
re-presentation. 

The  painter  and  the  sculptor  often  seek  as 
complete  representation  as  possible,  and  what  may 
be  called  complete  representation  is  within  the 
range  of  their  resources.  Yet  unless  some  in- 
dividual choice  or  feeling  impresses  the  work  of 
either  kind  it  is  not  a  re-presentation,  but  becomes 
an  imitation,  and  therefore  inartistic. 

The  decorative  designer  and  ornamentist  seek 
to  suggest^  rather  than  to^re-present,  though  the 
decorator's  suggestion  of  natural  form,  taking 
only  enough  to  suit  or  express  the  particular  orna- 
mental purpose,  must  be  considered  also  as  a 
re-presentation.  How  much,  or  how  little,  he  will 
take  of  actual  nature  must  depend  largely  upon 
his  resources,  his  object,  and  the  limitations  of  his 
material — the  conditions  of  his  work  in  short  ;  but 
his  range  may  be  as  wide  as  from  the  flat  sil- 
houetted forms  of  stencils  or  simple  inlays  to  the 
highly-wrought  mural  painting. 

Design  motive,  individual  conception  and  senti- 
ment, apart  from  material,  must,  of  course,  always 
affect  the  question  of  the  choice  and  degree  of 
representation  of  nature.  The  painter  will  some- 
times feel  that  lie  only  wants  to  suggest  forms, 
such  as  figures  or  buildings,  half  veiled  in  light 
and  atmosphere,  colours  and  forms  in  twilight,  or 
half  lost  in  luminous  depths  of  shadow. 

216 


FLORAL   DESIGNS    UPON  TYPICAL    INCLOSING    SHAPES   OF    INDIAN 
AND    PERSIAN    ORNAMENT. 


DANCING    FIGURE   WITH    THE   GOVERNING   LINES   OF   THE 

MOVEMENT. 

2l8 


LINES    OF    FLORAL   GROWTH  AND   STRUCTURE  :    LILY    AND    ROSE. 

219 


THE   OUTWARD   VISION   AND   INNER   VISION 

The  decorative  designer  will  sometimes  want  to 
emphasize  forms  with  the  utmost  force  and  realism 
at  his  command,  as  in  some  crisp  bit  of  carving  or 
emphatic  pattern,  to  give  point  and  relief  in  his 
scheme  of  quantities. 

There  is  no  hard-and-fast  rule  in  art,  only 
general  principles,  constantly  varied  in  practice, 
from  which  all  principles  spring,  and  into  which, 
if  vital,  they  ought  to  be  capable  of  being  again 
resolved. 

But  a  design  once  started  upon  some  principle 
—some  particular  motive  of  line  or  form — then, 
in  following  this  out,  it  will  seem  to  develop  almost 
a  life  or  law  of  growth  of  its  own,  which  as  a 
matter  of  logical  necessity  will  demand  a  particular 
treatment — a  certain  natural  consistency  or  har- 
mony— from  its  main  features  down  to  the  smallest 
detail  as  a  necessity  of  its  existence. 

We  might  further  differentiate  art  as,  on  the  one 
hand,  the  image  of  the  outward  vision,  and,  on  the 
other,  as  the  outcome  or  image  of  the  inner  vision. 

The  first  kind  would  include  all  portraiture,  by 
which  I  mean  faithful  portrayal  or  transcript 
whether  of  animate  or  inanimate  nature  ;  while 
the  second  would  include  all  imaginative  concep- 
tions, decorative  designs,  and  pattern  inventions. 

The  outward  vision  obviously  relies  upon  what 
the  eye  perceives  in  nature.  Its  virtue  consists 
in  the  faithfulness  and  truth  of  its  graphic  record, 
in  the  penetrating  force  of  observation  of  fact, 
and  the  representative  power  by  which  ihey  are 
reproduced  on  paper  or  canvas,  clay  or  marble. 

The  image  of  the  inner  vision  is  also  a  record, 
but  of  a  different  order  of  fact.  It  may  be  often 

220 


I    AND     2,    MOUNTAIN     AND     CRAG     SCULPTURE  :     COAST     LINES, 
GULF   OF    NAUPLIA  ;     3,     LINES    OF    MOVEMENT    IN    WATER  : 
SHALLOW    STREAM    OVER    SAND. 
221 


THE  OUTWARD  VISION  AND  INNER  VISION 
of  unconscious  impressions  and  memories  which 
are  retained  and  recur  with  all  or  more  than  the 
vividness  of  actuality — the  tangible  forms  of  ex- 
ternal nature  calling  up  answering,  but  not  identical, 
images  in  the  mind,  like  reflections  in  a  mirror  or 
in  still  water,  which  are  similar  but  never  the 
same  as  the  objects  they  reflect. 

But  the  inner  vision  is  not  bound  by  the  appear- 
ances of  the  particular  moment.  It  is  the  record 
of  the  sum  of  many  moments,  and  retains  the 
typical  impress  of  multitudinous  and  successive 
impressions — like  the  composite  photograph,  where 
faces  may  be  printed  one  over  another  until  the 
result  is  a  more  typical  image  than  any  individual 
one  taken  separately. 

The  inner  vision  sees  the  results  of  time  rather 

ithan   the    impressions  of   the  moment.       It  sees 

[g£#££    rather    than    landscape :    race    rather    than 

men  :    spirits  rather  than  mortals  :    types^  rather 

than  individuals. 

The  inner  vision  hangs  the  mind's  house  with 
a  mysterious  tapestry  of  figurative  thoughts,  a  rich 
and  fantastic  imagery,  a  world  where  the  elements 
are  personified,  where  every  tree  has  its  dryad, 
and  where  the  wings  of  the  winds  actually  brush 
the  cheek. 

The  inner  vision  re-creates  rather  than  repre- 

•  sents,  and  its  virtue  consists  in  the  vividness  and 

beauty  with  which,  in  the  language  of  line,  form, 

and  colour,  these  visions  01  the  mind  are  recorded 

and  presented  to  the  outward  eye. 

There  is  often  fusion  here  again  between  two 
different  tendencies,  habits  of  mind,  or  ways  of 
regarding  things.  In  all  art  the  mind  must  work 

222 


THE  OUTWARD  VISION  AND  INNER  VISION 
through  the  eye,  whether  its  force  appears  in 
closeness  of  observation  or  in  vivid  imaginings. 
The  very  vividness  of  realization  even  of  the  most 
faithful  portraiture  is  a  testimony  to  mental  powers. 
The  difference  lies  really  in  the  focus  of  the 
mental  force  ;  and,  in  any  case,  the  language  of 
line  and  form  we  use  will  neither  be  forcible  or 
convincing,  neither  faithful  to  natural  fact  nor  true 
to  the  imagination,  without  close  and  constant 
study  of  external  form  and  of  its  structure  as  well 
as  its  aspect. 


CHAPTER   IX 

Of  the  Adaptation  of  Line  and  Form  in  Design,  in  various 
materials  and  methods — Mural  Decoration- -Fresco-work  of  the 
Italian  Painters — Modern  Mural  Work — Mural  Spacing  and 
Pattern  Plans— Scale— The  Skirting— The  Dado— Field  of  the 
Wall — The  Frieze — Panelling — Tapestry — Textile  Design — 
Persian  Carpets— Effect  of  Texture  on  Colour— Prints— Wall- 
paper— Stained  Glass. 

WE  have  been  considering  hitherto  the  choice 
and   use  of  line    and  form,   and   various 
methods  of  their  representation  in  drawing,  both 
from  the  point  of  view  of  the  graphic  draughtsman 
and  that  of  the  ornamental  designer. 

We  now  come  to  consider  the  subject  solely 
from  the  latter  standpoint  (the  point  of  view  of 
ornamental  design) ;  and  it  will  be  useful  to  en- 

O       / 

deavour  to  trace  the  principles  governing  the 
selection  of  form  and  use  of  line  as  influenced  by 
some  of  the  different  methods  and  conditions  of 
craftsmanship,  and  as  adapted  to  various  decora- 
tive purposes. 

The  most  important  branch  of  decorative  art 
may  be  said  to  be  mural  decoration,  allied  as  it  is 
with  the  fundamental  constructive  art  of  all — ar- 
chitecture, from  which  it  obtains  its  determining 
conditions  and  natural  limitations. 

Its  history  in  the  past  is  one  of  splendour  and 
dignity,  and  its  record  includes  some  of  the  finest 

224 


MURAL   DECORATION 

art  ever  produced.  The  ancient  Asiatic  nations 
were  well  aware  of  its  value  not  only  as  decoration 
but  as  a  record. 

The  palace  and  temple  and  tomb-walls  of  ancient 
Egypt,  Persia,  and  Assyria  vividly  illustrate  the 
life  and  ideas  of  those  peoples,  while  they  conform 
to  mural  conditions.  The  painted  council  halls 


GIOTTO:  "CHASTITY"  (LOWER  CHURCH,  ASSISI). 

and  churches  of  the  Middle  Ages  fulfil  the  same 
purpose  in  a  different  spirit ;  but  mural  decoration 
in  its  richest,  most  imaginative  and  complete  form 
was  developed  in  Italy,  from  the  time  of  Giotto, 
whose  famous  works  at  the  Arena  Chapel  at  Padua 
and  Assisi  are  well  known,  to  the  time  of  Michael 
Angelo,  who  in  the  sublime  ceiling  of  the  Sistine 
Chapel  seemed  to  touch  the  extreme  limits  of 
mural  work,  and  in  fact  might  be  said  to  have 

225  Q 


FRESCO-WORK  OF  ITALIAN  PAINTERS 
almost  defied  them,  painting  mouldings  in  relief 
and  in  perspective  to  form  the  framework  of  pic- 
tures where  figures  on  different  scales  are  used. 
In  the  Sistine  Chapel  the  series  of  earlier  frescoes 
on  the  lower  wall  by  Botticelli,  Lorenzo  di  Credi, 
Ghirlandajo,  Pinturicchio,  and  other  Florentine 
painters  of  the  fifteenth  century  are  really  more 
strictly  mural  in  feeling,  and  safer  as  guides  in 
general  treatment,  than  the  work  of  the  great 
master  himself.  They  have  much  of  the  repose 
and  richness  as  well  as  the  quiet  decorative  effect 
of  tapestry. 

The  frescoes  in  the  Palazzo  Publico  at  Siena, 
Pinturicchio's  work  in  the  Piccolomini  Chapel  and 
the  Appartimenti  Borgia,  the  Campo  Santo  at 
Pisa  and  the  Riccardi  Chapel  of  Benozzo  Gozzoli 
at  Florence,  may  be  mentioned  as  among  the  gems 
of  mural  painting. 

We  have  but  little  important  mural  painting  in 
this  country.  Doubtless,  from  various  traces  dis- 
covered under  Puritan  whitewash,  the  walls  of  our 
mediaeval  churches  were  painted  as  frequently  as 
in  continental  countries,  but  so  completely  did 
artistic  tradition  and  religious  sentiment  change 
after  the  Reformation  that  the  opportunities  have 
been  few  and  the  encouragement  less  for  mural 
painting.  An  attempt  to  revive  fresco-painting 
was  made  in  our  Houses  of  Parliament,  and 
various  scenes  from  our  national  history  have  been 
rendered  with  varying  degrees  of  merit  ;  but  they 
have  chiefly  demonstrated  the  need  of  continuous 
practice  in  such  work  on  the  part  of  our  painters 
and  the  absence  of  a  true  decorative  instinct. 

It   is   to  the    honour   of   Manchester  that  her 
226 


MODERN   MURAL   WORK 

Town    Hall  contains  one  of  the  most  important 
and  interesting  pieces  of  mural  painting  by  one 


PINTURICCHIO  :  MURAL  PAINTING  (PICCOLOMINI  CHAPEL,  SIENA). 

of  the  most  original  of  modern  English  artists — 
Ford  Madox  Brown — a  work  conceived  in  the  true 
spirit  of  mural  work,  being  a  record  of  local  his- 

227 


MODERN   MURAL  WORK 

tory,  as  well  as  a  decoration,  while  distinctly  modern 
in  sentiment  and  showing  strong  dramatic  feeling, 
as  well  as  historical  knowledge. 

The  chapel  on  which   Mr.  F.  J.  Shields  is  en- 
gaged in  London  will  probably  be  unique  in  its' 
way  as  a  complete  piece  of  mural  decoration  by  an 
English  artist  of  singular  individuality,  sincerity, 
and  power,  as  well  as  decorative  ability. 

But  unfortunately  opportunities  for  important 
mural  decoration  of  this  kind  are  very  rare  in 
England.  The  art  is  not  popularized  :  we  have 
no  school  of  trained  mural  designers,  and  we 
have  no  public  really  interested.  Our  commercial 
system  and  system  of  house  tenure  are  against  it. 
Our  only  chance  is  in  public  buildings,  which  in- 
deed have  always  been  its  best  field.  Yet  we 
neglect,  I  think,  a  most  important  educational  in- 
fluence. The  painted  churches  and  public  halls 
of  the  Middle  Ages  filled  in  a  great  measure  the 
place  of  public  libraries.  A  painted  history,  a 
portrait,  a  dramatic  or  romantic  incident  told  in 
the  vivid  language  of  line,  form,  and  colour,  is 
stamped  upon  the  memory  never  to  be  forgotten. 
It  would  be  possible,  I  think,  to  impart  a  tolerably 
exact  knowledge  of  the  sequence  of  history,  of  the 
conditions  of  life  at  different  epochs,  of  great  men 
and  their  work,  from  a  well-imagined  series  of 
mural  paintings,  without  the  aid  of  books  ;  and  in 
this  direction,  perhaps,  our  school  walls  would 
present  an  appropriate  field. 

Modern  opportunities  of  mural  decoration  are 
chiefly  domestic.  The  country  mansion,  or  the 
modest  home  of  the  suburban  citizen,  affords  the 
principal  field  in  our  time  for  the  exercise  of  the 

228 


MODERN  MURAL  WORK. 

taste  or  ingenuity  of  the  wall-decorator.  In  this 
comparatively  restricted  field,  taste  is  perhaps  of 
more  consequence  than  any  other  quality.  A 
sense  of  appropriateness,  a  harmonizing  faculty,  a 
power  of  arrangement  of  simple  materials — these 
are  invaluable,  for,  more  than  any  others,  they  go 
to  the  making  of  a  livable  interior. 

On  first  thought  it  would  almost  seem  as  if 
the  designer  was  less  technically  restricted  in  this 
direction  of  mural  work  than  any  other ;  yet  he 
will  soon  feel  that  he  cannot  produce  an  artistic 
and  thoughtful  scheme  without  taking  many  things 
into  consideration  which  really  belong  to  the  con- 
ditions or  natural  limitations  of  his  work. 

There  is,  firstly,  the  idea  of  the  wall  itself — part 
of  the  house-structure — a  shelter  and  protection 
or  boundary.  It  is  no  part  of  a  designer's  business 
to  put  anything  upon  the  wall  in  the  way  of  decora- 
tion which  will  induce  anyone  to  forget  that  it  is 
a  wall — nothing  to  disturb  the  flatness  and  repose. 

The  four  walls  of  a  room  inclose  a  space  to 
dwell  in,  in  comfort  and  security.  The  windows 
show  us  outward  real  life  and  nature.  The  walls 
should  not  compete  with  the  windows.  Nature 
must  be  translated  into  the  terms  of  line  and  form 
and  colour,  and  invention  and  fancy  may  be  pleas- 
antly suggestive  in  the  harmonious  metre  and 
rhythm  of  pattern. 

A  wall  surface  extends  horizontally  and  ver- 
tically, but  the  vertical  extension  seems  to  assert 
itself  most  to  the  eye. 

Any  arrangement  of  lines  of  the  trellis  or  diaper 
order  logically  covers  a  wall  surface,  and  may  be 
appropriately  used  as  a  basis  for  a  wall  pattern, 

229 


MURAL  SPACING  AND  PATTERN  PLANS 
whether  merely  to  mark  the  positions  of  a  simple 
spray  or  formal  sprig  pattern,  or  as  a  ground-plan 
for  a  completely  filled  field  of  repeating  ornament, 
whether  painted,  stencilled,  or  in  the  form  of  wall- 
paper or  textile  hanging. 

In  the  simple  geometric  net  of  squares  or 
diamonds  or  circles,  however,  there  is  nothing 
that  emphatically  marks  adaptability  to  a  vertical 
position.  Such  plans  in  themselves  are  equally 
appropriate  to  the  floor  in  the  form  of  paving  and 
parquet.  The  ogee  plan,  however,  and  its  variant, 
the  vertical  serpentine  or  spiral  plan,  at  once 
suggest  vertical  extension,  the  former  perhaps 
by  its  leaf-like  points  arranging  themselves  scale- 
wise,  and  the  latter  by  its  suggestion  of  ascending 
movement. 

It  is  noteworthy  that  in  the  course  of  the  historic 
evolution  of  mural  decoration,  designs  based  upon 
these  systems  constantly  recur.  They  are  part 
of  the  pattern-designer's  vocabulary  of  line,  and 
among  the  principal,  though  simplest,  terms  by 
which  he  is  able  to  express  vertical  extension. 

The  question  of  scale  in  designing  mural  decora- 
tion of  any  sort  is  very  important.  This  demands 
a  certain  power  of  realizing  the  effect  of  certain 
lines  and  masses  if  carried  out,  and  the  relation  of 
one  part  to  another  as  well  as  to  the  dimensions 
of  the  walls  and  the  room  itself.  Here,  as  indeed 
throughout  art,  a  reference  to  the  human  figure 
will  give  us  our  key,  since  after  all  decoration  goes 
to  form  a  background  for  humanity.  With  natural 
flowers  and  leaves  it  is  always  right  to  design  for 
mural  purposes  on  the  same  scale  as  nature. 

Scale  in  design   should  be   also  considered   in 
230 


DIAGRAM    SHOWING    THE    PRINCIPAL  FUNDAMENTAL    PLANS 
OR    SYSTEMS     OF     LINE    GOVERNING     MURAL     SPACING 
AND    DECORATIVE    DISTRIBUTION. 
231 


SCALE 

relation  to  the  general  character  of  a  building  and 
its  purpose,  the  use  and  lighting  of  a  living  room  : 
its  dimensions  and  proportions,  and  relation  to 
other  rooms.  There  is  great  range  for  individual 
taste  and  fancy. 

The  artist  would  naturally  look  to  the  capacity 
of  the  space  which  he  had  to  decorate,  and  what  it 
suggested  to  his  mind.  He  might  want  to  empha- 
size a  long,  low  room  by  horizontal  lines,  or  to 
accentuate  a  lofty  one  by  verticals. 

By  the  judicious  use  of  line  and  scale  in  design, 
the  designer  holds  a  certain  power  of  transforma- 
tion in  his  hands,  not  to  speak  of  the  transforming 
effect  of  colour  of  different  keys  and  tones,  the 
apparent  contraction  or  expansion  of  surfaces  by 
patterns  of  different  character  and  scale. 

It  would  obviously  not  do  to  regard  any  wall 
merely  as  so  much  expanse  of  surface  available  for 
sketching  unrelated  groups  and  figures  upon,  as 
they  might  be  jotted  down  in  a  sketch-book,  and 
to  offer  it  as  decoration.  In  an  interior  thus 
treated,  we  should  lose  all  sense  of  repose,  dignity, 
and  proportion. 

Use  and  custom,  which  fix  and  determine  so 
many  things  in  social  life  without  written  laws, 
have  also  prescribed  certain  divisions  of  the  wall, 
which,  in  regard  to  the  exigencies  of  life  and  habit 
and  modern  conditions  generally,  seem  natural 
enough. 

The  lower  parts  of  the  walls  of  most  modern 
dwellings  being  generally  occupied  by  furniture 
placed  against  them,  and  liable  to  be  soiled  or  in- 
jured, it  would  be  out  of  place  to  put  important 
and  elaborate  ornament  or  figure  designs  extend- 

232 


DIAGRAM  TO  SHOW  (l)  HOW  THE  APPARENT  DEPTH  OF  A  SPACE 
IS  INCREASED  BY  THE  USE  OF  VERTICAL  LINES,  AND  (2) 
HOW  THE  APPARENT  WIDTH  IS  INCREASED  BY  THE  USE 
OF  HORIZONTAL  LINES. 

233 


THE   SKIRTING 

ing  to  the  skirting.  The  wooden  skirting,  of 
about  nine  inches  or  a  foot  in  depth,  which  is 
placed  along  the  foot  of  the  wall  in  our  modern 
rooms,  is  the  armour-plating  to  protect  the  plaster, 
which  otherwise  might  be  chipped  and  litter  the 
floor.  It  is  perhaps  the  last  relic  of  the  more 
substantial  and  extensive  wood  panelling  and 
wainscotting  which,  up  to  the  latter  part  of  the 
last  century,  covered  the  lower  walls  of  the  more 
comfortable  houses,  and  has  been  revived  in  our 
own  day.  The  decorator  may  use  panelling,  or 
wainscotting,  or  a  simple  chair-rail  above  plain 
painting,  wall-paper,  dado,  or  stencilling,  or  a 
dado  of  matting,  as  methods  of  covering,  and  at 
the  same  time  decorating,  the  lower  walls  of 
rooms. 

The  use  of  the  dado  of  a  darker  colour  and  of 
wainscot  is,  no  doubt,  due  to  considerations  of 
wear  and  tear,  and  so,  like  the  origin  of  much 
ornamental  art,  may  be  traced  to  actual  use  and 
constructive  necessity.  When  the  wood-work  of 
a  room — the  doors  and  window  frames — is  of  the 
same  colour  and  character  as  the  dado,  a  certain 
agreeable  unity  is  preserved,  and  it  forms  a  useful 
plain  framing  to  set  off  the  patterned  parts  of  the 
wall.  This  wainscot  or  dado  framing  with  the 
wood-work  should  be  as  to  colour  arranged  to 
suit  the  general  scheme  adopted.  Where  paint 
is  used,  white  for  the  wood-work  usually  has  the 
best  effect. 

The  largest  space  of  wall  occurs  above  the 
chair-rail,  or  dado,  and,  according  to  modern 
habits  and  usage,  portable  property  in  the  shape 
of  framed  pictures,  etc.,  is  usually  placed  here 

234 


(A) 


DECORATIVE  SPACING  OF  THE  WALL  :  SKETCHES  (TO  f-IN. 
SCALE)  TO  SHOW  DIFFERENT  TREATMENT  AND  PROPOR- 
TIONS. 

235 


FIELD   OF  THE   WALL 

along  the  eye-line,  so  that  any  decoration  on  this 
— the  main  field  of  the  wall — is  regarded  as  sub- 
sidiary to  what  is  placed  upon  it ;  but,  of  course, 
pictures  can  be  used  as  the  central  points  of  a 
decorative  scheme.  On  the  upper  part  of  a  wall, 
below  the  plaster  cornice,  the  mural  designer  has 
the  chance  of  putting  a  frieze,  and  a  frieze  usually 
gives  the  effect  of  additional  height  to  a  room, 
besides  enriching  the  wall. 

An  effective  treatment  of  a  large  room,  and  one 
which  is  more  reposeful  than  cutting  up  the  wall 
into  these  portions,  as  in  dado,  field,  and  frieze,  is 
to  carry  up  wood  panelling  to  the  frieze,  and  let 
this  (the  frieze)  be  the  important  decorative  feature. 

Supposing  the  room  was  twelve  feet  high,  one 
could  afford  to  have  eight  feet  of  panelling,  and 
then  a  frieze  of  four  feet  deep.  In  this  case  one 
would  look  for  an  interesting  painted  frieze  of 
figures — some  legend  or  story  to  run  along  the 
lour  sides  of  the  room,  and  in  such  a  case  it  might 
be  marked  with  considerable  pictorial  freedom. 

More  formal  figure  design  or  ornamental  work 
in  coloured  plaster-work,  stucco,  and  gesso  could 
also  be  appropriately  used  in  such  a  position,  as 
also  on  the  ceiling. 

Now  as  regards  choice  of  line  and  form  in  their 
relation  to  the  decoration  of  such  mural  spaces. 
Taking  the  lower  wall,  dado,  or  panelling,  one 
reason  why  panelling  has  so  agreeable  an  effect  is, 
I  think,  that  the  series  of  vertical  and  horizontal 
lines  seem  to  express  the  proportions,  while  they 
emphasize  the  flatness  and  repose  of  the  wall,  and 
when  used  beneath  a  painted  frieze  they  lead  the 
eye  upwards,  forming  a  quiet  framing  of  rectan- 

'  236 


TAPESTRY 

gular  lines  below  to  the  ornate  and  varied  design 
of  the  frieze.  Where  we  are  limited  to  decorating 
a  wall  by  means  of  plain  painting,  stencils,  or  wall- 
paper, this  idea  of  reposeful  constructive  lines  and 
forms  on  the  lower  wall  should  still  dominate  upon 
the  field.  Subject  to  our  repeating  plan  we  may 
be  freer  both  in  line  and  form,  using  free  scrolls, 
branch-work,  fruit,  and  flower  masses  at  pleasure, 
because  the  space  is  more  extended,  and  we  shall 
feel  the  necessity  in  a  repeating  pattern  of  spread- 
ing adequately  over  it ;  but  such  designs,  however 
fine  in  detail,  should  be  constructed  upon  a  more 
or  less  geometric  base  or  plan.  We  are,  as  regards 
the  main  field  of  the  wall,  still  unavoidably,  though 
not  disadvantageously,  influenced  by  the  tradition 
of  the  textile  hanging  or  arras  tapestry,  no  doubt; 
and  certainly  there  is  no  more  rich  and  comfortable 
lining  for  living  rooms  than  tapestry,  or,  at  the 
same  time,  more  reposeful  and  decoratively  satisfy- 
ing. But,  of  course,  where  we  can  afford  arras 
tapestry  (such  as  the  superb  work  of  William 
Morris  and  his  weavers),  we  ought  not  to  allow 
anything  to  compete  with  it  upon  the  same  wall. 
It  is  sufficient  in  itself. 

Of  what  splendour  of  colour  and  wealth  of  de- 
corative and  symbolical  invention  tapestry  was 
capable  in  the  past  may  be  seen  in  magnificent 
Burgundian  specimens  of  the  fifteenth  century, 
now  in  the  South  Kensington  Museum. 

Tapestry  hangings  of  a  repeating  pattern  and 
quiet  colour  could  be  used  appropriately  beneath 
painted  upper  walls,  or  a  frieze,  as  no  doubt  fre- 
quently was  the  custom  in  great  houses  in  the 
Middle  Ages. 

237 


APPARTIMENTI   BORGIA 

In  the  Appartimenti  Borgia  in  the  Vatican,  for 
instance,  which  consists  of  lofty  vaulted  rooms  with 
frescoes  by  Pinturicchio  upon  the  upper  walls  be- 
tween the  spans  of  the  vaulting,  and  upon  the 
vaulting  itself,  we  may  see,  about  eleven  feet  from 
the  floor,  along  the  moulding,  the  hooks  left  for  the 
tapestry  hangings,  which  completed  the  decoration 
of  the.  room.  The  lower  walls  are  now  largely 
occupied  by  book-shelves  ;  but  books  themselves 
may  form  a  pleasant  background,  as  one  may  often 
observe  in  libraries,  especially  when  the  bindings 
are  rich  and  good  in  tone  :  and  here,  too,  we  get 
our  verticals  and  horizontals  again. 

So  long  as. the  feeling  for  the  repose  and  flatness 
of  the  wall  surface  is  preserved,  there  are  no  special 
limitations  in  the  choice  of  form.  It  becomes  far 
more  a  matter  of  treatment  of  form  and  subject  in 
perfectly  appropriate  mural  design.  There  is  one 
principle,  however,  which  seems  to  hold  good  in 
the  treatment  of  important  figure  subjects  to  occupy 
the  main  wall  surfaces  as  panels  :  while  pictorial 
realization  of  a  kind  may  be  carried  quite  far,  it  is 
desirable  to  avoid  large  masses  of  light  sky,  or  to 
attempt  much  in  the  way  of  atmospheric  effect.  It 
is  well  to  keep  the  horizon  high,  and,  if  sky  is 
shown,  to  break  it  with  architecture  and  trees. 

Still  more  important  is  it  to  observe  this  in 
tapestry.  It  is  very  noticeable  how  tapestry  de- 
sign declined  after  the  fifteenth  century  or  early 
years  of  the  sixteenth,  when  perspective  and  pic- 
torial planes  were  introduced,  and  sky  effects  to 
emulate  painting,  and  thus  the  peculiarly  mural 
feeling  was  lost,  with  its  peculiar  beauty,  richness, 
and  repose. 

238 


FIGURE    OF    LAURA,  FROM    THE    BURGUNDIAN    TAPESTRIES:    '1HE 
TRIUMPHS    OF    PETRARCH    (SOUTH    KENSINGTON    MUSEUM). 

239 


THE    FRIEZE 

In  the  translation  into  tapestry  even  of  so 
tapestry-like  a  picture  as  that  of  Botticelli's ."  Pri- 
mavera,"  it  is  noteworthy  how  Mr.  Morris  has  felt 
the  necessity  of  reducing  the  different  planes,  and 
the  chiaroscuro  of  the  painting,  by  more  leafy  and 
floral  detail  ;  making  it,  in  short,  more  of  a  pattern 
than  a  picture. 

A.  frieze  is  susceptible  of  a  much  more  open, 
lighter,  and  freer  treatment  than  a  field.  A  frieze 
is  one  of  the  mural  decorator's  principal  means  of 
giving  lightness  and  relief  to  his  wall.  In  purely 
floral  and  ornamental  design  the  field  of  close 
pattern,  formal  diaper,  or  sprigs  at  regular  inter- 
vals may  be  appropriately  relieved  by  bolder  lines 
and  masses,  and  a  more  open  treatment  in  the 
frieze.  The  frieze,  too,  affords  a  means  of  contrast 
in  line  to  the  line  system  of  the  field  of  the  wall, 
its  horizontal  expression  usefully  opposing  the 
verticals  or  diagonals  of  the  wall  pattern  below. 
The  frieze  may  be  regarded  as  a  horizontal  border, 
and  in  border  designs  the  principle  of  transposition 
of  the  relation  of  pattern  to  ground  is  a  useful  one 
to  bear  in  mind,  as  leading  always  to  an  effective 
result.  I  mean,  supposing  our  field  shows  a  pattern 
mainly  of  light  upon  dark,  the  frieze  might  be  on 
the  reverse  plan,  a  dark  pattern  on  a  light  ground. 

And  whereas,  as  I  have  said,  one  would  exclude 
wide  light  spaces  from  our  mural  field,  in  the  frieze 
one  might  effectively  show  a  light  sky  ground 
throughout,  and  arrange  a  figure  or  floral  design 
upon  that. 

The  principle  governing  the  treatment  of  main 
and  lower  wall  spaces  or  fields,  which  teaches  the 
designer  to  preserve  the  repose  of  the  surface,  may 

240 


TEXTILE   DESIGN 

be  said  to  rule  also  in  all  textile  design,  and  textile 
design  has,  as  we  have  seen  in  the  form  of  tapes- 


PINTURICCHIO  :    FRESCO    IN    THE    APPARTIMENTI    BORGIA. 

try,  and  hangings  of  all  kinds,  a  very  close  associ- 
ation with  mural  decoration. 

Any  textile  may  be  considered,  from  the  de- 
signer's point  of  view,  as  presenting  so  much  sur- 

241  R 


TEXTILE    DESIGN 

face  for  pattern,  whether  that  surface  is  hung  upon 
a  wall,  or  curtains  a  door  or  a  window,  or  is  spread 
in  the  form  of  carpets  or  rugs  upon  floors,  or  over 
the  cushions  of  furniture,  or  adapts  itself  to  the 
variety  of  curve  surface  and  movement  of  the 
human  form  in  dress  materials  and  costume.  Tex- 
tile beauty  is  beauty  of  material  and  surface,  and 
unless  the  pattern  or  design  upon  it  or  woven  with 
it  enhances  that  beauty  of  material  and  surface, 
and  becomes  a  part  of  the  expression  of  that 
material  and  surface,  it  is  better  without  pattern. 

To  place  informal  shaded  flowers  and  leaves 
upon  a  carpet,  for  instance,  where  the  warp  is 
very  emphatic,  and  the  process  of  weaving  neces- 
sitates a  stepped  or  rectangularly  broken  outline, 
is  to  mistake  appropriate  decorative  effect,  capacity 
of  material,  and  position  in  regard  to  the  eye.  We 
cannot  get  away,  in  a  carpet,  from  the  idea  of  aflat 
field  starred  with  more  or  less  formal  flowers,  and 
colour  arrangements  which  owe  their  richness  and 
beauty,  not  to  the  relief  of  shading,  but  to  the 
heraldic  principle  of  relieving  one  tint  or  colour 
upon  another.  The  rich  inlay  of  colour  which  a 
Persian  or  any  Eastern  carpet  presents  is  owing 
to  its  being  designed  upon  this  principle  ;  and  in 
Persian  work  that  peculiarly  rich  effect  of  colour, 
apart  from  fine  material,  is  owing  to  the  principle 
of  the  use  of  outlines  of  different  colours  defining 
and  relieving  the  different  forms  in  the  pattern 
upon  different  grounds.  The  rectangular  influence 
arising  from  the  technical  conditions  of  the  work 

o 

gives  a  definite  textile  character  to  the  design 
which  is  very  agreeable  ;  besides,  as  a  question  of 
line  and  form,  in  a  carpet  or  rug  which  is  rect- 

242 


PORTION  OF  DETAIL  OF  THE  HOLY  CARPET  OF  THE  MOSQUE 

OF  ARDEBIL:  PERSIAN,  SIXTEENTH  CENTURY. 

243 


EFFECT  OF  TEXTURE  ON  COLOUR  : 
angular  in  shape  and  laid  usually  upon  rectangular 
floors,  the  squareness  of  form  harmonizes  with  the 
conditions  and  surroundings  of  the  work  in  use. 
The  Persian  designer,  indeed,  appears  to  be  so 
impressed  with  this  feeling,  that  he  uses  a  succes- 
sion of  borders  around  the  central  field  of  his  car- 
pet or  rug,  still  further  emphasizing  the  rectangu- 
larity  ;  while  he  avoids  the  too  rigid  effect  of  a 
series  of  straight  lines  which  the  crossing  of  the 
threads  of  the  weft  at  right  angles  to  the  warp 
might  cause,  by  changing  the  widths  of  his  subsi- 
diary borders  and  breaking  them  with  a  constant 
variety  of  small  patterns,  and  inserting  narrow 
white  lines  between  the  black  lines  of  the  border. 

In  tapestry  the  effect  of  the  emphatic  warp 
worked  vertically  in  the  loom,  but  hung  hori- 
zontally, has  a  very  important  influence  upon  the 
effect.  If  we  took  a  piece  of  paper  coloured  with 
a  flat  even  tint,  and  folded  it  in  ridges,  the  quality 
of  the  tint  would  be  at  once  changed,  and  so  in 
tapestry  the  passing  of  the  wool  of  the  wefts, 
which  form  the  pattern  or  picture,  over  the  strong 
lines  of  the  warp — which  are  broad  enough  to 
take  the  outlines  of  the  cartoon  upon  them — pro- 
duces that  soft  and  varied  play  of  colour — really 
colour  in  light  and  shade — which,  over  and  above 
the  actual  dyes  and  artistic  selection  of  tints,  gives 
the  peculiar  charm  and  effect  in  tapestry. 

This  sheen  and  variety  are  more  or  less  evident 
in  all  textiles,  and  a  good  textile  pattern  only 
adds  to  the  variety  and  richness  of  the  surface. 
The  different  thicknesses  or  planes  of  surface 
and  the  difference  of  their  texture  caused  by  the 
different  wefts  being  brought  to  the  surface  of  the 

244 


SKETCH    TO    ILLUSTRATE   TREATMENT    OF    BORDERS   IN    A 
PERSIAN    RUG. 


PRINTS 

cloth  or  silk  (from  the  simplest  contrast  of  line 
presented  by  the  simplest  arrangements  of  warp 
and  weft,  to  the  complexities  of  many -coloured 
silk  stuffs  and  brocade)  alone  give  a  value  to  the 
surface  pattern. 

In  cut  velvet  the  same  principle  of  contrast  of 
surface  is  emphasized  still  further,  the  rich  deep 
nap  of  the  less  raised  parts  contrasting  pleasantly 
with  the  mat  effect  of  the  ground. 

In  designs  for  such  material  one  should  aim  at 
boldly  blocked-out  patterns  in  silhouette— bold 
leaf  and  fruit  forms  say — designed  on  the  prin- 
ciple of  the  stencil. 

/  With  prints  the  range  is  of  course  freer,  the 
/material  itself  suggesting  something  lighter  and 
more  temporary.  It  seems  highly  probable  that 
printed  cotton  was  originally  a  substitute  for  em- 
broidered linen  or  more  sumptuous  materials. 
There  are  certainly  instances  of  very  similar 
patterns  in  Indian  and  Persian  work  in  silk  em- 
broidery, and  also  in  printed  cotton.  In  some 
cases  the  print  is  partly  embroidered,  which  seems 
to  mark  a  transitional  stage,  and  recalls  the 
lingering  use  of  illumination  in  the  early  days 
of  the  printing  press,  in  another  department  of 
art. 

Anything  that  will  repeat  as  a  pattern  in  what 
can  be  produced  by  line,  dot,  and  tints  of  colour, 
and  engraved  upon  wood-blocks  or  copper  rollers, 
can  be  printed  of  course  ;  and,  as  is  generally  the 
case  with  an  art  which  has  no  very  obvious  tech- 
nical limitations,  it  is  liable  to  be  caught  by  the 
imitative  spirit,  and  cheap  and  rapid  production 
and  demand  for  novelties  (so-called)  generally  end 

246 


ARRAS    TAPESTRY  :     DIAGRAMS    TO    SHOW 
WORKING   AND     SURFACE    EFFECT: 
TION    OF  WARP   AS  WORKED  IN  THE 
EFFECT    OF    THE     WEFTS;     (2)    EN 
WARP  AS   HUNG   (HORIZONTAL)  ;  (3) 


THE  PRINCIPLE  OF 
(l)  VERTICAL  POSI- 

LOOM  AND  RELIEF 
LARGED  SECTION  OF 
SINGLE  THREADS  OF 


WARP  AND  WEFT;  (4)  WARP  AND  WEFT  AS  IN  THE  LOOM 
/VERTICAL). 


PRINTS 

in  loss  of  taste  and  deterioration  of  quality,  espe- 
cially in  design.  From  the  artistic  point  of  view 
we  can  only  correct  this  by  bearing  in  mind 
similar  considerations  to  those  which  hold  good 
as  general  principles  and  guides  in  designing  for 
textiles  generally,  having  regard  to  the  object, 
purpose,  and  position — to  the  ultimate  use  of  the 
material,  and  differentiating  our  designs,  as  in  the 
case  of  other  textile  design  accordingly. 

Thus  in  the  matter  of  plan  and  direction  of  line 
and  character  of  form  we  shall  at  once  find 
natural  distinctions  and  divisions,  as  our  design 
is  for  hanging,  or  spreading  horizontally,  or  wear- 
ing ;  and  these  different  functions  will  also  deter- 
mine scale  and  choice  and  treatment  of  form  and 
colour. 

There  is  no  doubt  that  with  patterns  printed 
more  range  may  be  allowed  than  with  patterns  to 
be  woven,  where  line  and  form  are  both  controlled 
by  the  necessities  of  being  reproduced  by  so  many 
points  to  the  inch.  At  the  same  time  the  object 
of  all  design  and  pattern  work  being  the  greatest 
beauty  compatible  with  the  material  and  condi- 
tions, one  should  seek,  not  such  effects  as  merely 
test  the  capacity  or  ingenuity  of  the  machine,  but 
rather  such  as  appear  to  be  most  decoratively 
appropriate  and  effective. 

There  appears  to  be  no  mechanical  reason  why 
cotton  should  not  be  printed  all  over  with  land- 
scapes and  graphic  sketches,  and  people  clothe 
themselves  with  them  as  with  Christmas  numbers, 
or  turn  their  couches,  chairs,  and  curtains  into 
scrap  albums,  but  there  is  every  reason  on  the 
score  of  taste  why  these  things  should  not  be  done. 

248  ^ 


(l)   CONTRASTING    SURFACES   OF   WARP    AND     WEFT    IN    WOVEN 
SILK    HANGING  j  (2)   STENCIL    PRINCIPLE. 


PRINTS 

With  any  textile,  as  I  have  said,  we  are  as 
designers  dealing  with  surface.  It  is  surface 
ornament  that  is  wanted  also  in  printed  cotton. 
Now  good  line  and  form  and  pure  tints  have  the 
best  effect,  because  they  do  not  break  the  surface 
into  holes,  and  give  a  ragged  or  tumbled  appear- 
ance, which  accidental  bunches  of  darkly-shaded 
flowers  in  high  relief  undoubtedly  do.  If  small 
rich  detail  and  variety  are  wanted,  we  should  seek 
it  in  the  inventive  spirit  of  the  Persian  and  Indian, 
and  break  our  solid  colours  with  mordants  or 
arabesques  in  colour  of  delicate  subsidiary  pattern 
instead  of  using  coarse  planes  of  light  and  shadow, 
or  showing  up  ragged  and  unrelated  forms  upon 
violent  grounds. 

The  true  idea  of  a  print  pattern  is  of  something 
gay  and  fanciful  :  bright  and  fresh  in  colour,  and 
clear  in  line  and  form  :  a  certain  quaintness  is 
allowable,  and  in  purely  floral  designs  there  is 
room  for  a  considerable  degree  of  what  might  be 
called  naturalism,  so  far  as  good  line-drawing  and 
understanding  of  flower  form  goes,  emphasis  of 
colour  being  sought  by  means  of  planes  of  colour, 
rather  than  by  planes  of  shadow. 

I  had  intended  to  touch  upon  other  provinces 
of  design,  but  I  have  taken  up  so  much  space 
with  those  I  have  been  discussing  already  that  I 
can  only  now  briefly  allude  to  these. 

Of  wall-paper,  which  may  be  regarded  in  the 
light  of  more  or  less  of  a  substitute  for  mural 
painting,  and  also  textile  wall-hangings,  much  the 
same  general  principles  and  many  of  the  same 
remarks  apply  as  have  been  already  used  in 
regard  to  mural  decoration.  The  designer  has 

250 


INDIAN    PRINTED    COTTON    COVER:    SOUTH    KENSINGTON    MUSEUM. 


251 


WALL-PAPER 

much  freedom  as  to  motive,  and  his  ingenuity  is 
only  bounded  by  or  concentrated  in  a  square  of 
twenty-one  inches.  If  he  has  succeeded  in  making 
an  agreeable  pattern  which  will  repeat  not  too 
obviously  over  an  indefinite  space,  to  form  a  not 
obtrusive  background,  and  which  can  be  printed 
and  sold  to  the  ordinary  citizen,  he  is  supposed  to 
have  satisfied  the  conditions. 

But  he  may  be  induced  to  go  further  and 
attempt  the  design  of  a  complete  decoration  as 
far  as  dado,  field,  frieze,  and  ceiling  go ;  and  this 
would  involve  all  the  thought  necessary  to  the 
mural  painter,  narrowed  down  to  the  exigencies  of 
mechanical  repeat. 

Allied  to  the  wall  is  the  window,  and  in  glazing 
and  the  art  of  the  glass-painter  we  have  another 
very  distinct  and  beautiful  sphere  of  line  design. 
In  plain  leading  the  same  law  of  covering  vertical 
surface  holds  good  as  to  selection  of  plan  and 
system  of  line  :  almost  any  simple  geometric  net 
is  appropriate,  if  not  too  complex  or  small  in  form 
to  hold  glass  or  to  permit  lead  to  follow  its  lines. 
Leaded  panels  of  roundels  (or  "  bull's  eyes  ")  of 
plain  glass  have  a  good  effect  in  casements  where 
a  sparkle  of  light  rather  than  outward  view  is 
sought  for. 

When  we  come  to  designing  for  stained  glass 
we  should  still  bear  in  mind  the  fundamental  net 
of  lead  lines  which  forms  the  basis  of  our  pattern, 
or  glass  picture,  as  it  were  :  and  the  designer's 
object  should  be  to  make  it  good  as  an  arrange- 
ment of  line  independently  of  the  colour,  while 
practical  to  the  glazier. 

Although  lead  is  very  pliable,  too  much  must 
252 


(l)    STAINED     GLASS     TREATMENT  :     INCLOSURE     OF    FORM    AND 
COLOUR    BY    LEAD    LINES  ;    (2)  SECTIONS. 

253 


STAINED   GLASS 

not  be  expected  of  it  in  the  way  of  small  depres- 
sions and  angles  :  the  boundary  lines  of  the  figures, 
which  should  be  the  boldest  of  all,  should  be  kept 
as  simple  as  possible,  not  only  on  this  account, 
but  because  complex  outlines  cannot  well  be  cut 
in  glass.  A  head,  for  instance,  is  inclosed  in 
sweeping  line,  and  the  profile  defined  within  the 
lead  line  by  means  of  painting.  A  hand  would  be 
defined  on  the  same  principle,  Each  different 
colour  demands  a  different  inclosure  of  lead, 
although  in  the  choice  of  glass  much  variation  of 
tint  can  be  obtained,  as  in  the  case  of  pot  metal 
running  from  thin  to  thick  glass,  which  intensifies 
the  colour,  and  many  kinds  of  what  is  called 
flashed.  Yet  to  the  designer,  from  the  point  of 
view  of  line,  glass  design  is  a  kind  of  translucent 
mosaic,  in  which  the  primal  technical  necessity  of 
the  leading  which  holds  the  glory  of  the  coloured 
light  together,  really  enhances  its  splendour,  and 
in  affording  opportunities  for  decoration  and  ex- 
pressive linear  composition  imparts  to  the  whole 
work  its  particular  character  and  beauty. 

This  after  all  is  the  principle  to  cling  to  in  all 
designing,  to  adapt  our  designs  to  the  particular 
distinctive  character  and  beauty  of  the  material 
for  which  they  are  destined,  to  endeavour  to  think 
them  out  in  those  materials,  and  not  only  on 
paper.  Whatever  the  work  may  be — carving, 
inlays,  modelling,  mosaic,  textiles — through  the 
whole  range  of  surface  decoration,  we  should 
think  out  our  designs,  not  only  in  relation  to  the 
limitations  of  their  material,  but  also  in  their  re- 
lation to  each  other,  to  their  effect  in  actual  use, 
and  even  to  their  possible  use  in  association  to- 

254 


STAINED   GLASS 

gether,  which,  of  course,  is  of  paramount  import- 
ance in  designing  a  complete  room  or  any  com- 
prehensive piece  of  decoration. 

And  when  we  leave  plane  surfaces  and  seek  to 
invent  appropriate,  that  is  to  say,  expressive  orna- 
ment allied  to  concave  and  convex  surfaces,  to  the 
varied  forms  of  pottery  for  instance,  metal-work, 
and  glass  vessels,  furniture,  and  accessories  of  all 
kinds,  we  shall  find  the  same  laws  and  principles 
hold  good  which  should  guide  us  in  all  design — to 
adapt  design  to  the  characteristics  and  conditions 
of  the  material,  to  its  structural  capacity,  its  use 
and  purpose,  as  well  as  to  use  or  invention  in  line, 
both  as  a  controlling  plan  or  base  of  ornament,  as 
well  as  a  means  of  the  association  and  expression 
of  form. 


255 


CHAPTER   X 

Of  the  Expression  and  Relief  of  Line  and  Form  by  Colour 
—Effect  of  same  Colour  upon  different  Grounds — Radiation  of 
Colour — White  Outline  to  clear  Colours — Quality  of  Tints  re- 
lieved upon  other  Tints — Complementaries — Harmony— The 
Colour  Sense— Colour  Proportions — Importance  of  Pure  Tints 
—Tones  and  Planes — The  Tone  of  Time — Pattern  and  Picture 
— A  Pattern  not  necessarily  a  Picture,  but  a  Picture  in  principle 
a  Pattern — Chiaroscuro — Examples  of  Pattern-work  and  Pic- 
ture-work— Picture-patterns  and  Pattern-pictures. 

PERHAPS  the  most  striking  means  of  the 
expression  of  relief  of  line  and  form,  certainly 
the  most  attractive,  is  by  colour.  By  colour  we 
obtain  the  most  complete  and  beautiful  means  of 
expression  in  art 

Our  earliest  ideas  of  form  are  probably  derived 
through  the  different  colours  of  objects  around  us, 
by  which  they  are-  thrown  into  relief  upon  the 
background,  or  against  other  objects  ;  and,  as  I 
mentioned  in  the  first  chapter,  we  reach  outline  by 
observing  the  edges  of  different  masses  relieved 
as  dark  or  light  upon  light  or  dark  grounds,  so 
now,  in  my  last,  we  come  again  to  the  considera- 
tion of  the  definition  of  line  and  form  by  colour, 
and  their  relief  and  expression  upon  different 
planes  or  fields  of  colour. 

There  is  first  the  colour  of  the  object  itself — the 
local  colour — and  then  the  colour  of  the  ground 

256 


SKETCH    TO    SHOW    EFFECT    OF   THE    SAME   COLOUR    AND    FORM 
UPON    DIFFERENT    COLOURED    GROUNDS. 


257 


RELIEF  OF  LINE  AND  FORM  BY  COLOUR 
upon  which  it  is  relieved,  both  of  which  in  their 
action  and  reaction  upon  each  other  will  greatly 
affect  the  value  of  the  local  colour  and  the  degree 
of  relief  of  the  form  upon  it. 

One  of  the  best  and  simplest  ways  to  ascertain 
the  real  value  of  a  colour  and  its  effect  upon  differ 
ent  grounds  or  fields  is  to  take  a  flower — say  a 
red  poppy,  and  place  it  against  a  white  paper 
ground,  blocking  in  the  local  colour  as  relieved 
upon  white,  as  near  as  may  be  to  its  full  strength, 
with  a  brush,  and  defining  the  form  as  we  go 
along.  Then  try  the  same  flower  upon  grounds 
of  different  tints — green,  blue,  yellow — and  it  will 
be  at  once  perceived  what  a  different  value  and 
expression  the  same  form  in  the  same  colour  has 
upon  different  tinted  grounds.  A  scarlet  poppy 
would  appear  clearest  and  darkest  upon  white  ;  it 
would  show  a  tendency  upon  a  blue  ground  to 
blend  or  blur  at  its  edges,  and  also  on  yellow  and 
green  to  a  less  extent. 

It  is  this  tendency  to  lose  the  edges  of  forms 
owing  to  the  radiation  of  colours,  and  to  mingle 
with  the  colour  of  the  background,  which  makes  a 
strong  outline  so  constantly  a  necessity  in  decora- 
tive work.  One  may  use  a  black  on  a  white,  a 
brown,  or  a  gold  outline  (as  in  cloisonne),  the 
nature  of  the  outline  being  generally  determined 
by  the  nature  of  the  work.  In  stained  glass  the 
outline  must  be  black,  and  this  black  is  of  the 
greatest  value  in  enhancing  by  opposition  the 
brilliance  of  the  colours  of  the  glass  it  incloses, 
stopping  out  the  light  around  it  as  it  does  in  solid 
lead  when  placed  in  the  window. 

A  white  outline  produced  by  a  resist  or  a  mord- 

258 


(l)  PRINCIPLE  OF  THE  EFFECT  OF  THE  BLENDING  OR 
BLURRING  OF  COLOURS  AT  THEIR  EDGES;  (2) 
USE  OF  BLACK  AND  WHITE  OUTLINE  TO  CLEAR 
THE  EDGES  OF  COLOURED  FORMS  UPON  DIFFER- 
ENT COLOURED  GROUNDS. 

259 


CLEARING  COLOURED  FORMS 
ant  in  a  printed  textile,  where  the  colours  used 
are  full  and  rich,  often  has  a  good  effect,  lightening 
the  effect  while  giving  point  and  definition  to  cer- 
tain leading  forms.  Instances  of  the  use  of  white 
outlines  may  be  found  in  Eastern  carpets,  where 
the  main  colours,  being  dark  blue  and  yellows  on 
rich  red,  are  relieved  in  parts  by  a  dull  white  out- 
line. Also  in  Persian  carpets  of  the  sixteenth  or 
seventeenth  century,  the  scrollwork  in  red  is  often 
relieved  by  an  ivory  white  outline  on  blue. 

It  is  always  a  good  practice  in  blocking  in 
flowers,  either  from  nature  or  as  parts  of  a  design, 
to  leave  a  white  outline  at  the  junctions — that  is 
to  say,  where  one  petal  overlaps  another,  or  where 
there  is  a  joint  in  the  stem,  or  a  fold  in  the  leaf— 
and  to  show  the  ribbings,  markings,  and  divisions 
of  flower  and  leaf. 

By  judiciously  changing  the  quality  of  our  tints 
it  is  possible  to  make  different  colours  in  a  pattern 
tell  clearly.  To  relieve  red  upon  blue,  for  in- 
stance, one  would  use  an  orange  red  upon  green- 
ish blue,  or  scarlet  upon  a  gray  blue — the  general 
principle  being  apparently  a  kind  of  compensating 
balance  between  colours,  so  that  in  taking  from 
one  you  give  to  another. 

A  full  red  and  blue  used  together,  as  we  have 
seen,  would  show  a  tendency  to  purple,  unless 
separated  by  outlines  ;  so  that  if  the  blue  was 
full  and  rich,  the  red  would  have  to  approach 
brown  or  russet ;  or  if  the  red  was  a  full  one — a 
crimson  red — the  blue  would  have  to  approach 
green. 

This  may  be  because  of  the  necessary  comple- 
ments in  colours,  which  we  see  in  nature,  and 

260 


HARMONY 

which  prepossess  the  eye,  and  make  it  demand 
these  modifications  to  satisfy  the  sense  of  harmony. 

When  daylight  struggles  with  candle-  or  lamp- 
light, one  may  notice  that  upon  the  white  cloth  of 
a  dinner-table  the  light  is  blue  and  the  shadows 
yellow  or  orange — the  orange  deepening  as  with 
the  fading  daylight  the  blue  grows  deeper,  until 
the  colour  of  the  light  and  the  shadow  change 
places.  The  same  principle  may  be  noticed  in 
firelight,  but  the  redder  the  flame  the  greener  will 
be  the  shadows. 

Harmony  in  colour  may  be  said  to  consist- 
apart  from   the  general   acknowledgment  of   the 
law  of  complementaries,  in  giving  quality  to  the 
raw  pigments  by  gradation,  by  a  certain  admixture 
or  infusion  of  other  colours. 

To  begin  with  the  negatives — white  and  black 
—white  may  be  creamy  or  silvery ;  black  may  be 
of  a  greenish  or  a  bluish  or  brownish  tone  ;  then 
the  primaries — red,  blue,  yellow,  or  red,  green, 
violet — red  may  range  from  crimson  to  orange 
and  russet ;  yellow  may  approach  green  or  gold  ; 
green  may  be  first  cousin  to  blue  ;  blue  may  be 
turquoise  on  the  one  hand,  and  touch  purple  upon 
the  other  ;  and  so  on  through  infinite  variations  of 
half  tints  and  tones. 

No  doubt  it  is  an  easier  matter  to  harmonize 
half  tints  than  full  bright  colours,  which  may 
account  for  the  prevalence  of  the  former  in  deco- 
rative work.  Nature's  pattern-book,  too,  is  full 
of  half  tones  and  mixed  tints. 

We  may  not  all  see  colour  precisely  in  the  same 
way,  and  the  same  colour  may  appear  to  be  of  a 
different  tint  to  different  eyes  ;  and  it  seems  cer- 

261 


THE   COLOUR   SENSE 

tain  that  climate  and  surroundings  affect  the  colour 
sense  :  light  and  colour  will  stimulate  the  delight 
in  colour ;  while,  where  grayness  and  dullness 
characterize  the  surroundings  of  life,  the  colour 
sense  will  grow  weak,  or,  if  it  is  manifested  at  all, 
it  will  show  a  tendency  to  grayness  and  heaviness 
of  tint. 

The  art  of  the  different  peoples  of  the  world 
illustrates  this,  and,  as  we  may  see  by  turning 
from  east  to  west,  or  from  north  to  south,  or  even 
from  winter  to  summer,  in  the  main  the  love  ot 
colour  follows  the  sun,  like  the  rainbow. 

We  can  all  do  something  to  cultivate  our  sense 
of  colour,  however,  and  there  is  no  better  way 
than  studying  the  harmonies  and  varieties  of 
nature.  Even  the  town-dweller  is  not  altogether 
deprived  of  the  sight  of  the  sky,  which  constantly 
unfolds  the  most  beautiful  compositions  both  of 
form  and  colour. 

As  to  the  choice  of  colours  in  decorative  design, 
so  far  as  that  is  not  narrowed  by  the  particular 
conditions  of  the  work,  we  must  be  guided  by 
much  the  same  considerations  as  would  serve  us 
in  designing  generally,  and  must,  of  course,  think 
of  appropriateness  to  position  and  purpose.  Much 
depends,  too,  upon  proportions  of  colour,  and  a 
beautiful  and  harmonious  effect  may  be  produced 
in  a  room  by  keeping  the  colour  in  a  particular 
key,  or  even  delicately  varying  the  designs  and 
tints  of  one  or  two  colours.  The  same  might  be 
said  in  arranging  a  scheme  of  colouring  for  any 
particular  piece  of  design — say,  a  painted  panel 
or  a  textile  pattern  ;  although  such  things  must 
ultimately  be  governed  by  their  relation  to  other 

262 


IMPORTANCE  OF  PURE  TINTS 
parts  in  any  general  scheme — circumstances  ne- 
cessitate their  being  often  designed  apart.  Still, 
if  the  colour  of  a  pattern  has  been  carefully  thought 
out,  or  rather  harmoniously  felt,  as  a  real  organic 
thing,  it  is  sure  to  fit  into  its  place  when  its  time 
comes. 

In  arranging  our  design  of  colour  we  can  have 
no  better  guide,  as  to  proportions  and  quality, 
than  nature,  and  should  do  well,  as  a  matter  of 
practice,  to  take  a  flower,  or  the  plumage  of  a 
bird,  or  the  co1ours  of  a  landscape,  and  adapt 
them  to  some  particular  pattern  or  scheme  of 
decoration,  following  the  relative  degrees  of  tint 
and  their  quantities  as  nearly  as  possible.  To  do 
this  successfully  requires  some  invention  and 
taste  ;  but  successful,  or  unsuccessful,  one  could 
hardly  fail  to  learn  something  positive  and  valu- 
able about  colour,  if  the  attempt  was  conscien- 
tiously made  ;  and  fresher  motives  and  sweeter 
colour  would  be  more  likely  to  result  from  such 
study. 

I  think  it  is  a  very  important  thing  in  all  de- 
corative work  to  keep  one's  colours  pure  in  quality, 
and  to  avoid  muddy  or  heavy  tints.  Brown  is  an 
especially  difficult  colour  to  use,  because  of  its 
generally  heavy  effect  as  a  pigment,  and  the  dif- 
ficulty of  harmonizing  it  with  other  colours  except 
as  an  outline ;  and  even  here  it  makes  all  the  dif- 
ference whether  it  is  a  cool  or  a  hot  shade.  A 
hot  brown  is  most  destructive  of  harmony  in 
colours.  It  is  safe,  as  a  rule,  to  make  it  lean  to 
green,  or  bronze,  or  gold. 

As  a  general  rule  it  is  well  to  work  either  in  a 
range  of  cool  tints — a  cool  key  of  colour,  or  the 

263 


IMPORTANCE  OF  PURE  TINTS 
reverse — a  warm  and  rich  one.  Few  cool  har- 
monies can  be  better  than  ultramarine  and  tur- 
quoise on  greenish  white,  of  which  the  Persians 
and  Indians  are  so  fond  in  tile-work.  They  are 
delightful  to  the  eye,  while  peculiarly  adapted  to 
the  work,  owing  their  quality  to  the  oxide  of 
copper,  which  the  firing  brings  out  so  well. 

Blues  and  greens  and  grays,  relieved  with  white 
and  yellow  and  orange  :  or,  reds  and  yellows,  re- 
lieved with  white  and  opposed  by  blacks,  generally 
answer  :  or  a  range  of  reds  together,  or  range  of 
blues,  or  of  yellows,  with  black  and  white  for  con- 
trast and  accent.  Blue  and  white,  too,  can  be 
modified  in  quality ;  black  may  be  greenish  in 
tone,  or  brownish,  bluish,  or  purplish  according  to 
the  harmony  aimed  at.  White  may  be  pure  or 
ivory-toned,  cream-coloured  or  influenced  by  other 
colours,  and  should  vary  in  degree  according  to  the 
strength  of  the  harmony.  This  brings  us  to  the 
question  of  tone. 

Now  the  ornamentist,  the  designer  ot  patterns, 
relies  for  his  effect  upon  the  use  of  certain  planes 
and  oppositions  of  tints  to  relieve  and  express  his 
design,  to  emphasize  its  main  motive,  to  bring  out 
or  to  subdue  its  lines  and  forms.  He  knows  that 
cool  flat  tints — blues,  greens,  grays — will  make 
forms  and  surfaces  retire,  and  he  makes  use  of 
them  for  flat  and  reposeful  effects,  such  as  wall 
and  ceiling  surfaces,  adopting  the  natural  principle 
of  colour  in  landscape  and  sky. 

He  uses  richer  and  more  varied  colour  in  textile 
hangings  and  carpets,  furniture,  and  accessories- 
reds,  yellows,   greens,   crimson,    russets,    orange, 
gold — which  answer  to  the  brighter  flowers  and 

264 


TONES   AND   PLANES 

parterres  of  our  gardens,  as  things  to  be  near  the 
eye  and  touch,  and  to  occur  as  lesser  quantities  in 
a  scheme  of  interior  colour  design. 

In  the  colour  design  of  patterns,  harmonious 
and  rich  effects  can  be  produced  by  the  use  of 
pure  colour  alone,  no  doubt,  if  carefully  propor- 
tioned, and  separated  by  outline  ;  though  harmony 
is. more  difficult  to  attain  in  pure  colours  used  in 
their  full  strength  ;  and  for  their  due  effect,  and  to 
avoid  harshness,  such  a  treatment  really  requires 
out-door  light  or  special  conditions  of  lighting,  or 
the  strong  light  of  eastern  or  southern  countries, 
to  soften  the  effect. 

And  since  we  have  to  adapt  our  designs  to 
their  probable  surroundings,  we  usually  consciously 
select  certain  tones  or  shades  of  a  colour,  rather 
than  use  it  absolutely  pure  or  in  its  full  strength. 
The  beautiful  tone  which  time  gives  to  all  colour- 
work  is  difficult  to  rival,  but  no  conscious  imitation 
of  it  is  tolerable. 

But  so  long  as  our  aim  is  strictly  to  make  a 
colour  scheme  of  any  kind  in  relation  to  itself,  or 
in  harmony  with  its  conditions,  we  are  on  a  safe 
and  sound  path.  It  is  this  relativity  which  is  the 
important  thing  in  all  decorative  art,  and  which, 
more  distinctly  than  any  other  quality,  distinguishes 
it  from  pictorial  art ;  although  pictorial  art  is 
under  the  necessity  of  the  same  law  in  regard 
to  itself;  and  in  its  highest  forms,  as  in  mural 
work,  is  certainly  subject  to  relativity  in  its  widest 
sense. 

At  first  sight  it  might  appear  as  if  there  were 
an  essential  fundamental  natural  difference  be- 
tween a  pattern  and  a  picture,  but  when  we  come 

265 


PATTERN   AND   PICTURE 

to  consider  it,  it  appears  to  be  rather  a  distinction 

than  a  difference. 

A  pattern  may  be  an  arrangement  of  lines, 
forms,  and  a  harmony  of  planes  and  tones  of 
colour. 

But  these  words  would  describe  in  general 
terms  a  picture  also. 

Certain  recurrences  of  line  and  form  ;  certain 
re-echoing  notes  of  the  same,  or  allied  colour,  are 
necessary  to  both  pattern  and  picture.  The  ab- 
stract ingredients  appear  to  be  the  same  in  both 
cases. 

A  picture  indeed  may  be  considered  as  a  pattern 
of  another  sort,  and  the  real  difference  is  that 
whereas  a  pattern  is  not  necessarily  a  picture,  a 
picture  is  bound  to  be  a  pattern — a  pattern  having 
its  quantities,  its  balance  of  masses,  its  connecting 
lines,  its  various  planes,  its  key  of  colour,  its  play 
of  contrasts,  its  harmony  of  tones. 

Technically,  a  picture  may  be  considered  as  an 
informal  pattern,  mainly  of  tone  and  values ;  while 
a  pattern  may  be  considered  as  a  formal  pattern, 
mainly  of  planes  of  colour. 

The  ancient  art  of  the  East  was  all  frankly 
pattern  -  work,  whatever  the  subject  pictured 
Egyptian,  Persian,  Indian,  Chinese,  Moorish  and 
Arabian  art,  in  all  their  varieties,  show  the  domin- 
ating sense  of  pattern,  and  the  invention  of  the 
instinctive  decorators  in  the  use  of  colour. 

The  Japanese,  also,- are  instinctive  decorators, 
though  in  a  less  formal  and  more  impressionistic 
way,  and  with  much  more  naturalistic  feeling. 
Their  pictures  printed  from  colour  blocks,  as  well 
as  their  "  kakimonos,"  painted  on  silk,  are  frankly 

266 


CHIAROSCURO 

pattern-pictures,  the  pattern  motive  being  quite 
as  strong  or  stronger  than  the  graphic  or  repre- 
sentative motive. 

Mediaeval  and  early  Renaissance  painting  in 
Europe  was  frankly  more  or  less  formal  and  of 
the  nature  of  ornament,  and  even  in  its  freest  and 
fullest  development,  in  the  works  of  the  great 
masters  of  the  sixteenth  century  of  Venice  and 
Florence,  a  certain  decorative  or  architectural 
feeling  was  never  forgotten. 

Painting  was  still  in  close  association  with  archi- 
tecture, and  was  the  chief  adornment  of  churches 
and  palaces  ;  thus  it  preserved  a  peculiar  distinc- 
tion and  dignity  of  style.  The  Dutch  school  did 
more  perhaps  to  break  these  old  decorative  and 
architectural  traditions  than  any  other,  with  their 
domestic  and  purely  naturalistic  motives,  their 
pursuit  of  realism,  atmospheric  effect,  and  chiar- 
oscuro— that  fascinating  goal  of  painting. 

Yet  there  were  some  of  the  seventeenth-century 
masters,  and  of  the  best,  such  as  De  Hooghe  and 
Ver  Meer  of  Delft,  who  showed  themselves  very 
much  alive  to  decorative  effect,  which  their  power 
of  chiaroscuro — the  power  of  painting  things  in 
their  proper  atmosphere,  as  lost  in  transparent 
depths  of  shadow,  or  found  in  luminous  mystery- 
only  seemed  to  enhance. 

As  a  wonderful  instance  of  ornamental  and 
dignified  design  carried  into  every  detail  with 
most  careful  draughtsmanship,  and  yet  beautiful 
in  chiaroscuro  and  grave  colour,  there  is  no  finer 
example  than  J.  Van  Eyck's  portrait-picture  of 
"Jan  Arnolfini  and  his  Wife"  in  our  National 
Gallery.  Such  pictures  as  these  would  tell  as 

267 


j.  VAN  EYCK:  "PORTRAIT  OF  JAN  ARNOLFINI  AND  HIS  WIFE. 
(NATIONAL  GALLERY.) 


268 


CHIAROSCURO 

rich  and  precious  gems  upon  the  wall,  and  would 
form  the  centres  to  which  the  surrounding  colour 
patterns  and  decoration  would  lead  up,  as  in  the 


VER  MEER  OF  DELFT:  "LADY  AT  A  SPINET."  (NATIONAL  GALLERY.) 

picture  the  little  mirror  reflecting  the  figures  shines 
upon  the  wall,  a  picture  within  a  picture. 

It  is  instructive  from  any  point  of  view  to  study 
the  quantities  and  relations  of  colour,  and  their 
tones  and  values,  in  such  works. 

269 


VER   MEER   OF   DELFT 

Take  Ver  Meer's  "  Lady  at  a  Spinet "  in  our 
National  Gallery. 

We  have  a  plain  white  wall,  exquisite  in  tone, 
upon  which  the  crisp  gold  of  the  small  picture  in- 
closing a  brownish  landscape  with  a  blue  and 
white  sky,  and  the  broad  black  frame  of  the  picture 
of  Cupid  tell  strongly,  yet  fall  into  plane  behind 
the  figure  in  white  satin — quite  a  different  quality 
of  white,  and  warmer  and  brighter  than  the  wall. 
The  bodice  is  a  steely  blue  silk,  which  is  repeated 
in  the  velvet  seat  of  the  chair  ;  while  the  blue  and 
white  landscape  upon  the  open  ltd  of  the  spinet 
repeats  the  blue  and  white  landscape  on  the  wall, 
and  the  blue  and  white  motive  is  subtly  re-echoed 
in  a  subdued  key  in  the  little  tiles  lining  the  base 
of  the  wall.  The  floor  is  a  chequer  of  black  and 
white  (mottled)  marble,  which  gives  a  fine  relief 
to  the  dress  and  repeats  the  emphatic  black  of  the 
picture  frame ;  the  stand  of  the  spinet  is  also  black 
striated  marble.  Quiet  daylight  falls  through  the 
greenish  white  of  the  leaded  panes.  The  pink- 
brown  woodwork  of  the  spinet  and  chair  prevent 
the  colour  scheme  from  being  cold.  The  flesh  is 
very  pale  and  ivory-like  in  tone,  but  the  dress  is 
enlivened  by  little  crisp  scarlet  and  gold  touches 
in  the  narrow  laces  which  tie  the  sleeves. 

The  little  picture  is  a  gem  of  painting  and  truth 
of  tone,  and  at  the  same  time  might  well  suggest 
a  charming  scheme  of  colour  to  an  ornamentist. 

Examine  the  Van  Eyck  in  the  same  way,  and 
we  shall  find  a  very  rich  but  quiet  scheme  of  colour 
in  a  lower  key,  highly  decorative,  yet  presented 
with  extraordinary  realistic  force,  united  with  ex- 
treme refinement  and  exquisite  chiaroscuro,  and 

270 


VAN   EYCK 

truth  of  tone  and  value,  as  a  portrait-picture,  and 
piece  of  interior  lighting. 

It  is  like  taking  an  actual  peep  into  the  inner 
life  of  a  Flemish  burgher  of  the  fifteenth  century. 

One  seems  to  breathe  the  still  air  of  the  quiet 
room,  the  gray  daylight  falling  through  the  leaded 
casements,  one  of  which  stands  open,  and  shows 
a  narrow  strip  of  luminous  sky  and  suggestion  of 
a  garden  with  scarlet  blossoms  in  green  leaves. 

The  man  is  clad  in  a  long  mantle  of  claret- 
brown  velvet  edged  with  fur,  over  black  tunic  and 
hose.  He  wears  a  quaint  black  hat  upon  his 
head,  which  almost  foreshadows  the  tall  hat  of  the 
modern  citizen.  The  pale  strange  face  looks  paler 
and  stranger  beneath  it,  but  is  in  character  with 
the  long  thin  hands.  The  figure  gives  one  the 
impression  of  legal  precision  and  dryness,  and  a 
touch  of  clerical  formality.  The  wife  is  of  a  buxom 
and  characteristic  Flemish  type,  in  a  grass-green 
robe  edged  with  white  fur,  over  peacock  blue ;  a 
crisp  silvery  white  head-dress  ;  a  dark  red  leather 
belt  with  silver  stitching.  Her  figure  is  relieved 
upon  the  subdued  red  of  the  bed  hangings,  con- 
tinued in  the  cover  of  the  settle  and  the  red  clogs. 
The  wall  of  the  room,  much  lost  in  transparent 
shade,  is  of  a  greenish  gray  tone,  and  in  the  centre, 
between  the  figures,  a  circular  convex  mirror 
sparkles  on  the  wall  reflecting  the  backs  of  the 
figures.  Thin  lines  delicately  repeat  the  red  in 
the  mirror  frame,  which  has  a  black  and  red  inner 
moulding.  A  string  of  amber  beads  hangs  on  the 
wall,  and  repeats  the  shimmer  of  the  bright  brass 
candelabra  which  hangs  aloft,  and  which  is  drawn 
carefully  enough  for  a  craftsman  to  reproduce. 

271 


PATTERN-PICTURES 

Both  designer  and  painter  may  find  abundant 
suggestion  in  this  picture,  which,  with  Ver  Meer's 
"  Lady  at  the  Spinet,"  I  should  describe  zspat'ern- 
pictures — that  is  to  say,  while  they  are  thoroughly 
painter's  pictures,  and  give  all  the  peculiar  qualities 
of  oil-painting  in  the  rendering  oi  tone  and  values, 
they  yet  show  in  their  colour  scheme  the  decorative 
quality,  and  might  be  translated  into  patterns  of  the 
same  proportions  and  keys  of  colours. 

As  examples  of  what  might  be  termed  picture- 
patterns  we  might  recur  to  the  wall  paintings,  as 
I  have  said,  of  ancient  Egypt  and  early  art  gener- 
ally, for  their  simplest  forms  ;  but  to  take  a  much 
later  instance,  and  from  the  art  of  Florence  in  the 
fifteenth  century,  look  at  Botticelli's  charming  little 
picture  of  "  The  Nativity,"  in  the  National  Gallery. 
It  has  all  the  intentional,  or  perhaps  instinctive, 
ornamental  aim  of  Italian  art,  and  its  colour  scheme 
shows  a  most  dainty  and  delicate  invention  in  the 
strictest  relation  to  the  subject  and  sentiment,  and 
is  arranged  with  the  utmost  subtlety  and  the  nicest 
art. 

The  ring  of  angels  above,  for  instance,  is  partly 
relieved  upon  a  gilded  ground — to  represent  the 
dome  of  heaven.  They  bear  olive  branches,  and 
the  colour  of  their  robes  alternates  in  the  following 
order  :  rose,  olive  (shot  with  gold),  and  white. 

The  rose-coloured  angels  have  olive  and  white 
wings  ;  the  white  angels,  rose  and  olive  wings ;  and 
the  olive  angels,  ^vhite  and  rose  wings, 

This  part  of  the  picture  by  itself  forms  a  most 
beautiful  pattern  motive,  while  it  expresses  the 
idea  of  peace  and  goodwill. 

Then  on  the  brown  and  gold  thatch  of  the 
272 


BOTTICELLI 


BOTTICELLI:  "THE  NATIVITY"  (NATIONAL  GALLERY). 


stable  occur  three  more  angels  in  white,  rose,  and 
green,  respectively.  Against  a  pale  sky  rise  rich 
olive-green  trees,  forming  the  background. 

The  Virgin  strikes  the  brightest  ray  of  colour 
273  T 


BOTTICELLI 

in  red  under-robe  and  sky-blue  mantle.     There  is 

a  gray  white  ass  and  a  pale  brown  cow  behind 

her. 

St.  Joseph  is  in  steel  gray  with  a  golden  orange 
mantle  over. 

The  brightest  white  occurs  in  the  drapery  upon 
which  the  infant  Christ  lies. 

An  angel  with  a  group  of  men  appears,  kneeling 
on  the  left  relieved  against  white  rocks  ;  their 
colours  are — the  angel's  wings — peacock  blue  and 
green,  and  a  pale  rose  robe.  The  next  figure  is 
in  scarlet ;  the  next  yellow ;  and  the  third  man 
wears  pale  rose  over  rich  grass-green. 

Of  the  shepherds  on  the  right  the  first  one  is  in 
russet  and  white,  the  next  steely  gray,  and  the 
angel  is  in  white  with  rose  and  pale  green  wings. 

The  ground  is  generally  warm  white  and  brown, 
with  dark  olive-coloured  grass  and  foliage,  so  that 
the  pattern  of  the  picture  is  mainly  a  ground  of 
olive,  gold,  and  white,  relieved  by  spots  of  rose, 
white,  blue,  yellow,  and  rose-red  and  scarlet — the 
colour  in  the  groups  of  angels  embracing  men  in 
*ront  being  the  deepest  in  tone. 

The  first  angel  in  this  group  (on  the  left)  wears 
green  shot  with  gold,  with  shot  green  and  gold 
wings,  the  human  being  in  dark  olive  and  rich 
crimson  red. 

Next  is  a  white  angel  with  pale  rose  wings  ;  the 
man  in  gray  with  a  red  mantle  over. 

Last  is  an  angel  in  rose,  with  rose  and  red 
wings,  the  man  being  in  scarlet  with  gray  mantle 
over.  All  the  men  hold  olive  branches,  and  the 
group  emphatically  illustrates  the  idea  of  "  on 
earth  peace  and  goodwill  towards  men/'  thus 

274 


HOLBEIN 

ending  on  the  keynote  both  of  colour  and  idea 
given  in  the  ring  of  angels  above. 

Thus  it  is  not  only  a  lovely  picture,  but  an 
exquisite  pattern. 

Another  instance  of  a  picture- pattern  extremely 


HOLBEIN  :    "  THE    AMBASSADORS  "    (NATIONAL    GALLERY). 

strong  and  brilliant  in  its  realization  oi  the  full 
force  and  value  of  bright  colour  opposed  by  the 
strongest  black  and  white,  may  be  found  in 
Holbein's  splendid  "  Ambassadors,"  also  in  our 
National  Collection. 

The  circular  picture  of  the  Madonna  and  Child, 
with  St.  John  and  an  angel,  by  Botticelli,  is  also 

275 


BOTTICELLI 

another  beautiful  instance  of  pictorial  pattern,  and 
of  design  well  adapted  and  adequately  filling  its 
space,  while  full  of  delicate  draughtsmanship, 


BOTTICELLI  I    "  MADONNA  AND  CHILD  "  (NATIONAL  GALLERY). 

poetic   sentiment,    and    extremely   ornate    in   its 
colour. 

Still  more  strictly  ornamental  in  character  and 
aim  is  Carlo  Crivelli's  "  Annunciation."     Amaz- 

276 


CARLO   CRIVELLI 

ingly  rich  in  invention,  and  beautifully  designed 
detail,  and  magnificently  decorative  in  its  colour 


CARLO  CRIVELLI :  "THE  ANNUNCIATION"  (NATIONAL  GALLERY). 

scheme  of  brick  reds  and  whites,  and  pale  pinks, 
and  steel  grays,  and  yellows,  varied  with  scarlet 

277 


PERUGINO 

and  black,  green,  blue  and  gold,  in  the  costumes 
and  draperies,  sparkling  with  jewels,  and  bright- 
ened with  rays  and  patterns  of  gold. 

Hardly  less  ornamental  in  its  more  conscious 
grace  and  Renaissance  feeling  is  Perugino's  trip- 
tych of  the  Virgin  adoring,  with  St.  Michael  on 
one  wing  and  St.  Raphael  and  Tobias  on  the 
other.  It  is  a  splendid  deep-toned  harmony  of 


PERUGINO:  "THE  VIRGIN  IN  ADORATION,  WITH  ST.  MICHAEL 
AND  ST.  RAPHAEL  AND  TOBIAS  "  (NATIONAL  GALLERY). 

blues,  and  warm  flesh  tones  and  golden  hair,  varied 
by  opals,  rose  red,  bronze,  green,  white,  and  purple 
and  orange. 

Titian's  "  Bacchus  and  Ariadne "  is,  perhaps, 
more  what  I  have  described  as  a  pattern-picture, 
and  is  of  a  much  later  type.  The  full  flush  of 
colour  and  pagan  joy  of  the  Renaissance  is  here 
paramount,  expressed  with  the  masterly  freedom  of 
drawing  and  magnificent  colour  sense  of  the  great 

278 


TITIAN 

Venetian  master.  Yet,  looking  through  the  life, 
the  movement,  the  swing  and  vitality  of  the  figures, 
and  the  power  and  poetry  by  which  the  story  is 
conveyed,  we  shall  find  a  fine  ornate  design,  sus- 
taining an  extremely  rich  and  sumptuous  pattern 
of  colour.  We  have  a  spread  of  deep-toned  blue 
sky  barred  with  silvery  white  and  gray  clouds, 


TITIAN:  "BACCHUS  AND  ARIADNE"  (NATIONAL  GALLERY). 

great  masses  of  brown  and  green  foliage  swaying 
against  it,  above  a  band  of  deep  blue  sea,  and  a 
field  of  rich  golden  brown  earth.  Warm  flesh 
tones,  deep  and  pale,  break  upon  this  with  a 
gorgeous  pattern  of  flying  rose,  blue,  scarlet, 
orange,  and  white  draperies,  varied  with  the 
spotted  coats  of  the  leopards,  the  black  of  the 
dog,  and  the  copper  vessel  and  warm  white  of 
tumbled  drapery. 

279 


TITIAN 

Keats  might  have  had  this  picture  in  his  mind 
when  he  wrote  the  song  in  "  Endymion  "  : 

"  And  as  I  sat,  over  the  light  blue  hills 
There  came  a  noise  of  revellers  :  the  rills 
Into  the  wide  stream  came  of  purple  hue. 

'Twas  Bacchus  and  his  crew  ! 

"  The  earnest  trumpet  speaks,  and  silver  thrills 
From  kissing  cymbals  made  a  merry  din — 
'Twas  Bacchus  and  his  kin  ! 

"  Like  to  a  moving  vintage  down  they  came, 
Crowned  with  green  leaves,  and  faces  all  on  flame ; 
All  madly  dancing  through  the  pleasant  valley, 
To  scare  thee,  Melancholy  \  " 

The  "  Sacred  and  Profane  Love  "  of  the  same 
painter,  in  the  Borghese  Gallery  at  Rome,  is  an 
even  more  splendid  example  of  colour  and  tone, 
and  is  probably  the  finest  of  all  Titian's  works. 

In  Paul  Veronese  we  find  a  cooler  key  of  colour 
generally,  with  a  fondness  for  compositions  of 
figures  with  classical  architecture,  the  rich  pat- 
terned robes  and  varied  heads  contrasting  pleas- 
antly with  the  severe  verticals  and  smooth  surfaces 
of  the  marble  columns — a  sumptuous  and  dignified 
kind  of  picture-pattern,  and  fully  adapted  to  the 
decoration  of  Venetian  churches  and  palaces  of 
the  Renaissance. 

Madox  Brown's  "  Christ  washing  St.  Peter's 
Feet,"  now  in  the  Tate  Gallery,  is  a  modern 
picture-pattern,  and  an  extremely  fine  one. 

These  are  but  a  few  instances  out  of  many,  and 
the  subject  of  colour  and  pattern,  like  the  ex- 
pression of  line  and  form,  of  which  it  is  a  part,  is 
so  large  and  its  sides  so  multitudinous  that  to  deal 
with  the  subject  fully  and  illustrate  it  adequately 

280 


F.    MADOX   BROWN 

would  need,  not  ten  chapters,  but  ten  hundred, 
and  could  only  be  compassed  by  the  history  of  art 
itself. 

If  anything  I  have  said  on  the  subject,  or  have 
been  able  to  show  by  way  of  illustration,  has  served 


MADOX  BROWN:  "CHRIST  WASHING  ST.  PETER'S  FEET"  (TAIE 
GALLERY). 

in  any  way  to  clear  away  obscurities,  or  to  lighten 
the  labours  of  students,  or  to  suggest  fresh  ideas 
to  the  minds  of  any  of  my  readers  in  the  theory, 
history,  or  practice  of  art,  I  shall  feel  that  my  work 
has  not  been  in  vain,  and,  at  all  events,  I  can  only 
say  that  I  have  endeavoured  to  give  here  the 
results  of  my  own  thoughts  and  experience  in  art. 

281 


CONCLUSION 

Some  may  look  upon  art  as  a  means  of  livelihood 
only,  a  handmaid  of  commerce,  or  as  a  branch  of 
knowledge,  to  be  acquired  only  so  far  as  to  enable 
one  to  impart  it  to  others  ;  others  may  regard  it  as 
a  polite  amusement ;  others,  again,  as  an  absorbing 
pursuit  and  passion,  demanding  the  closest  devo- 
tion :  but  from  whatever  point  of  view  we  may 
regard  it,  do  not  let  us  forget  that  the  pursuit  of 
beauty  in  art  offers  the  best  of  educations  for  the 
faculties,  that  its  interest  continually  increases,  and 
its  pleasures  and  successes  are  the  most  refined 
and  satisfying. 


282 


INDEX 


Adaptability  in  design,  124- 
126. 

Animal  forms,  use  of  in  de- 
sign, 1 06  ;  governed  by  in- 
closing boundaries,  104-106, 

IIO-II2. 

Architectural  mouldings,  re- 
lief in,  190. 

Architecture,  spaces  for  sculp- 
ture in,  113-116. 

Ardebil,  holy  carpet  of  the 
mosque  of,  243. 

Athens,  the  Tower  of  the 
Winds,  115-116. 

Bari,  i  o ;  the  "  Hundred  Birds  " 
of,  69. 

Birds,  Japanese  drawing  of, 
68,  69 ;  decorative  treat- 
ment of,  215. 

Blake's  Book  of  Job,  "The 
Morning  Stars,"  19,  20,  152. 

Border  motives,  recurrence  in, 
45,  46,  102. 

Book  decoration,  58,  59,  62  ; 
example  of  page  treatment, 
60. 

Botticelli,  frescoes  in  the  Sis- 
tine  Chapel,  226  ;  render- 
ing of  the  "  Primavera  "  in 
tapestry,  240 ;  his  "  Na- 
tivity," 272-275;  "Madonna 
and  Child,"  275-276. 


Boundaries,  definition  of,  2,  3  ; 
use  of  in  designing  sprays, 
38,  39  ;  in  designing  animal 
forms,  104 ;  influence  of, 
1 08;  relation  of  design  to, 
109  ;  decorative  spacing  of 
figures  in  geometric,  105, 
152-156. 

Brush-work,  65-68. 

Canterbury,  St.  Margaret 
Street,  153. 

Ceiling  decoration,  1 36. 

Charcoal  drawing,  68,  70. 

Chartres,  carving  on  the 
Cathedral,  197,  199,  201. 

Chiaroscuro,  267-269. 

Chinese  porcelain,  101. 

Colour,  effect  of  texture  on, 
244  ;  in  stained  glass,  252 ; 
expression  of  relief  in  line 
and  form  by,  256,  258 ;  ra- 
diation of,  258  ;  comple- 
ments in,  260  ;  harmony  in, 
261;  colour  sense,  261,262, 
colour  proportions,  262 ; 
importance  of  pure  colour, 
263. 

Composition,  formal,  152-156; 
informal,  157-164. 

Constantine,  Arch  of,  sketch 
of,  117. 

Contrast  in  design,   101 ;  use 


283 


INDEX 

of,  in  pattern  design,  166, 
et  seq. ;  principles  of,  in  black 
and  white,  206. 

Corinthian  order,  Roman  treat- 
ment of,  192,  193. 

Counterbalance,  43,  44,  95, 
96,  97,  130. 

Counterchange,  in  heraldry, 
171-174. 

Crivelli,  "The  Annunciation," 
276-278. 

Cube,  the,  73 ;  use  of  in 
architecture,  74,  77,  78;  in 
nature,  76. 

Dado,  use  of  the,  234. 

De  Hooghe,  Peter,  267. 

Desiderio  di  Settignano,  relief 
work  of,  202  ;  "  Madonna 
and  Child,"  at  South  Ken- 
sington, by,  202. 

Design,  linear  basis  of,  35 ; 
technical  influence  on,  58, 
59,  62  ;  beauty  in,  62,  63  ; 
influence  of  material  on,  64 ; 
quantities  in,  96-101 ;  con- 
trast in,  1 01 ;  living  tradition 
in,  126;  adaptability  in,  124- 
126;  extension  in,  126-131; 
geometric  structural  plans 
in,  130;  essentials  of,  138- 

139- 

De  Wint,  brush-work  of,  68. 

Diaper,  use  of  m  Middle  Ages, 
171,  174-175- 

Donatello,  relief  work  of,  202. 

Drapery,  tieatment  of  by  the 
old  masters,  183-186. 

Drawing  in  line,  methods  of, 
6,  7 ;  calligraphic  method,  8 ; 
tentative  method,  9 ;  Japan- 
ese method,  10;  oval  and 


rectangular     methods,     n, 
12. 

Diirer,  Albert,  his  "Geo- 
metrica,"  5  ;  roofs  in  his 
engravings,  148 ;  "  The 
Prodigal  Son,"  146;  "St. 
Anthony,"  147;  principle  in 
the  treatment  of  drapery, 
183,  184. 

Egyptian  sculpture,  192,  194- 

196. 
Emotion,  linear  expression  of, 

18-21. 
Emphasis,   54  ;  value  of,   56  ; 

effects  of  different  emphasis, 

57,    58,    59;    in    relief    of 

form,  1 80. 
Equivalents  in  form,  value  of, 

95.  96- 
Extension  in  design,  126-131. 

Figure  composition,  160  ;  ex- 
pression of  repose  and  action 
in,  161 

Figure  design,  relief  in,  204- 
207  ;  graphic  and  decora- 
tive treatment  of,  213. 

Figure  designs,  controlled  by 
geometric  boundaries,  152- 

156- 

Flaxman's  Homer,  designs 
from,  21. 

Flowers,  lines  of  characteriza- 
tion in  design  of,  12,  13; 
forms  controlled  by  inclos- 
ing boundaries,  1 10- 1 1 2. 

Foliage,  principles  of  structure 
in,  143-146. 

Form,  its  relation  to  line,  27  ; 
importance  of  knowledge  of, 
31  ;  choice  of,  73,  79;  ele- 


284 


mentary  forms  and  their  re- 
lation to  forms  in  nature 
and  art,  73-77  ;  grouping 
of,  83-87 ;  analogies  of,  89- 
91 ;  typical  forms  of  orna- 
ment, 92-95 ;  equivalents  in, 
95>  96 ;  variation  of  allied 
forms,  103 ;  governed  by 
shape  of  inclosing  boundary, 
105,  106,  112;  relief  of, 
165,  et  seq.  ;  expression  of, 
by  light  and  shade,  205,  209. 

Frieze,  origin  of  the,  113,  133; 
and  field,  133-135  ;  use  of 
the,  236  ;  treatment  of,  240. 

Fruit  forms,  treatment  of,  88, 
89. 

Gems,  engraved,  200. 

Geometric  forms,  elementary, 
73  ;  structural  plans  in  sur- 
face design,  128-133. 

Ghirlandajo,  226. 

Giotto,  "Chastity,"  225. 

Gozzoli,  Benozzo,  226. 

Graphic  aim,  the,  in  drawing, 
29-31,  205,  208-211. 

Grouping  of  forms,  83-87. 

Holbein,  "The  Ambassadors," 

275- 

Human  figure,  use  of  the,  in 
design,  104-107  ;  decorative 
spacing  of  within  geometric 
boundaries,  105-106,  107  ; 
governed  byinclosing  bound- 
aries, no,  1 1 2  ;  principles 
of  line  in,  142. 

Indian  ornament,  typical,  212, 
216;  printed  cotton  designs, 
246,  251. 

285 


INDEX 

Inlay  work,  choice  of  forms 
for,  81-83. 

Japanese  method  of  drawing 
with  the  brush,  10,  68; 
diagonal  pattern,  87;  colour 
prints,  266. 

Keene,  Charles,  190. 

Landscape,  expression  of  storm 
and  calm  in,  158,  159. 

Lead  pencil,  70. 

Letters,  formation  of,  4;  Diirer's 
method,  5.  * 

Line,  methods  of  drawing  in, 
6-12  ;  quality  of,  12-14  >  the 
language  of,  23;  comparison 
of  style  in,  24  ;  scale  of  de- 
grees and  qualities  of,  24, 
25  ;  its  relation  to  form,  27; 
question  and  answer  in,  35, 
36 ;  recurring,  45,  46;  ra- 
diating principle  of,  46-50  ; 
range  and  use  of,  47-49  ; 
choice  of,  51  ;  degree  and 
emphasis  of,  54 ;  influence 
of  technical  conditions  on, 
58-62  ;  controlling  influence 
of,  as  a  boundary  of  design, 
1 06,  108-113  »  value  of  re- 
curring, 119-124;  combina- 
tions of,  139;  principles  of 
structural  and  ornamental 
line,  140-145  ;  selection  of, 
218,  219. 

Linear  expression,  of  move- 
ment, 15,  1 6,  17;  of  tex- 
tures and  surfaces,  18,  19; 
of  emotion,  19,  20,  21 ;  scale 
of,  21 ;  power  of,  158,  160; 


INDEX 

of  fur  and  -  feathers,    208, 

211. 
Linear   motives    and   pattern 

bases,  simple,  109-111. 
Lippi,     Filippino,     study     of 

drapery  by,  185. 
Lorenzo  di  Credi,  226. 
Lysicrates,  monument  of,  133. 

Madox  Brown,  Ford,  mural 
painting  at  Manchester,  226, 
227;  "Christ  washing  Peters 
feet,"  280,  281. 

Mantling,  treatment  of,    170- 

173- 

Medals,  200,  203. 

Memory,  importance  of,  in  de- 
sign, 39. 

Michael  Angelo,  ceiling  of  the 
Sistine  Chapel,  225. 

Modelling,  principle  of  relief 
in,  192. 

Montague,  mantling  from  Gar- 
ter plate  of,  173. 

Morris,  William,  tapestry  of, 
236,  240. 

Movement,  linear,  expression 
of,  15-17  ;  lines  of,  in  a 
procession,  163 ;  in  a  danc- 
ing figure,  218;  in  water, 
221. 

Mural  decoration,  224,  225; 
diagram  of  systems  of  line 
governing,  231  ;  scale  in, 
230 ;  choice  of  line  and 
form  in,  236. 

Nauplia,  Gulf  of,  coast  and 
mountain  lines,  3,  215. 

Nerva,  Forum  of,  192,  193. 

Nuremberg,  ceiling  in  the 
Castle  of,  136,  137. 


Olive  branch,  study  of  from 
nature,  30 ;  decorative  treat- 
ment of,  32. 

Ornament,  typical  forms  of, 
92-94. 

Ornamental  purpose,  the,  in 
drawing,  29,  31-33,  210,  et 
seq. 

Ornamental  units,  94 ;  use  of 
intervals  in  repeating,  in. 

Outline,  origin  and  function 
of,  i. 

Parthenon,  the  frieze  of  the, 
46 ;  sketch  of,  114. 

Pattern  and  picture,  difference 
between,  265  ;  pattern-pic- 
tures, 272. 

Pen,  the,  compared  with  brush 
and  pencil,  71. 

Pencil  drawing,  70,  71. 

Persian  carpets,  principle  of 
design  in,  242;  treatment  of 
borders  in,  245  ;  white  out- 
line in,  260. 

Persian  ornament,  typical,  212, 
217. 

Persian  rugs,  value  of  different 
quantities  in,  98-101. 

Perugino,  National  Gallery 
triptych,  278. 

Photograph,  influence  of  the, 
55,  56 ;  principle  of  the, 
187,  190. 

Picture  writing,  27,  28. 

Pinturicchio,  frescoes  in  the 
Sistine  Chapel,  226;  mural 
painting  at  Siena,  226;  fres- 
coes in  the  Appartimenti 
Borgia,  238,  241. 

Pisano,  Vittore,  medals  of, 
198,  203. 


286 


Poppy,  horned  study  of,  33  ; 
adaptation  of  for  needle- 
work, 34  ;  sketch  of  on  dif- 
ferent coloured  grounds, 
257,  258. 

Prints,  principles  of  design  for, 
246-251. 

Procession,  lines  of  movement 
in  a,  160,  162-163. 

Pyramid,  the,  73  ;  use  of  in 
architecture,  74,  78. 

Radiating  principle  of  line,  the, 
46-50. 

Raphael,  study  of  drapery  by, 
1 86. 

Ravenna,  S.  Vitale,  sketch  of 
apse,  1 1 8. 

Recurring  line  and  form,  45, 
46 ;  value  of  in  architecture, 
119,  124. 

Relief,  methods  of  expressing, 
165  ;  use  of  contrast,  166; 
decorative  relief,  171  ;  on 
diapered  ground,  174-175; 
by  simple  linear  contrasts, 
174,  176-178;  by  linear 
shading,  176,  178;  by  diag- 
onal shading,  176,  178-180; 
value  of  emphasis  in,  180;  by 
light  and  shade  alone,  187- 
190;  principle  of  in  archi- 
tectural mouldings,  190 ; 
modelled,  192;  in  sculpture, 
192-199,  201 ;  Florentine 
fifteenth-century  work,  202 ; 
natural  principle  of,  204, 
207  ;  by  colour,  256,  258. 

Repeating  patterns,  36, 37, 1 29, 
131 ;  method  of  testing,  38, 
41. 

Rhythm  of  design,  the,  32. 


INDEX 

Roofs,  German,  146-148. 
Rothenburg,  roof-lines  in,  149. 

St.  David's  Cathedral,  carvings 
in,  122-124;  Gothic  tile  pat- 
tern in,  123,  125. 

Scale,  importance  of  in  mural 
decoration,  230,  232. 

Sculpture,  relief  in,  192 ;  Egypt- 
ian, 192,  194;  Grecian,  194, 
196,  197;  Gothics,  197;  on 
mediaeval  tombs,  198. 

Selection,  the  test  of  artistic 
treatment,  214. 

Shields,  F.  J.,  mural  decora- 
tion, 228. 

Silhouette,  2,  14. 

Skirting,  the,  234. 

Spaces,  decorative,  in  design, 
113;  apparent  depth  or 
width  increased  by  use  of 
vertical  or  horizontal  lines, 
232,  233. 

Spacing,     mural,     230,     231, 

^  235- 

Sphere,  the,  73  ;  use  of  in  archi- 
tecture, 74,78;  in  nature,  76. 

Stained  glass,  principles  of  de- 
sign for,  252,  255. 

Surfaces,  linear  expression  of, 
18. 

Tapestry,  237  ;  Burgundian, 
237,  239;  effect  of  texture 
on  colour  in,  244,  247. 

Technical  influence,  the,  58- 
62. 

Textile  designing,  62 ;  ex- 
amples of,  6 1  ;  value  of  dif- 
ferent qualities  in,  97-101 ; 
principles  of,  241,  242; 
colour  in,  244. 


287 


INDEX 

Textures,  linear  expression  of, 

18. 
Thebes,  sculptured   relief  at, 

195- 

Titian,  "  Bacchus  and  Ari- 
adne," 278-280;  "Sacred 
and  Profane  Love,"  280. 

Tivoli,  Temple  of  the  Sibyls 
at,  133. 

Trees,  effect  of  wind  upon, 
1 6  ;  general  principles  of 
line  and  form  in  foliage, 
etc.,  143-145. 

Typical  treatment,  31  ;  orna- 
ment, 92-95. 

Valence.  Aymer  de,  tomb  of, 

172. 
Van  Eyck,  "Jan  Arnolfini  and 

his  Wife,"   267,    268,    270, 

271. 

Variation  of  allied  forms,  103. 
Variety  in  design,  40. 


Ver  Meer,  "  Lady  at  Spinet," 

269-270,  272. 
Veronese,  Paul,  280. 
Visch,  Martin  de,  brass  of,  173, 


Walberswick  Church,  121. 
Walker,  Frederick,  190. 
Wall,  decorative  spacing  of  the, 

234,  235. 
Wall-paper,   principles  of  de- 

sign for,  36,  37,  246  ;  rela- 

tion between  frieze  and  field 

in,  133,  134. 
Water,  lines  of  movement  in, 

221. 
Watercourse,  lines  left  by  a, 

163. 

Wave  lines,  16,  17. 
Westminster,  vaulting  of  chap- 

ter house,  50. 
Winchelsea,  tomb  of  Gervaise- 

Alard,  120. 


CHISWICK   PRESS  :    PRINTED   BY   CHARLES  WHITTINGHAM   AND   CO. 
TOOKS  COURT,    CHANCERY   LANE,    LONDON. 


NC  Crane,  Walter 

710  Line  &  form 

C8 


PLEASE  DO  NOT  REMOVE 
CARDS  OR  SLIPS  FROM  THIS  POCKET 

UNIVERSITY  OF  TORONTO  LIBRARY